/

/
Digital Oscilloscope

Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701510-01E

7th Edition
 Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DL1520/DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L Digital

Oscilloscope.
This User’s Manual contains useful information about the functions and operating
procedures of the instrument, mainly DL1540. It also contains precautions that should be
observed during use. Main differences in the specifications between DL1540 and DL1520/
DL1520L/DL1540L are that DL1520 has two input channels, DL1520L has two input
channels and allows record length of up to 1M words, and DL1540L allows record length of
up to 2M words. Due to these differences, functions and operations differ slightly among
these models. For a detailed description, refer to the relevant sections of this manual. To
ensure correct use of the instrument, please read this manual thoroughly before operating it.
Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises.
Two manuals are provided with the instrument in addition to this manual.

Manual Name Manual No. Description

DL 1540/1540L/1520/1520L IM701510-02E Describes basic operations only.
Operation Guide
DL 1540/1540L/1520/1520L IM701510-11E Describes the communications functions
Communication Interface for the GP-IB/RS-232-C interface.
User’s Manual

Notes
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
improvements in the instrument’s performance and functions. Display contents illustrated
in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your screen.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its
contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your
nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.
• Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without
YOKOGAWA’s permission is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
HP-GL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Revisions
1st Edition : June 1995
2ndEdition : October 1995
3rd Edition : February 1996
4th Edition : May 1996
5th Edition : September 1996
6th Edition : March 1997
7th Edition : May 1997

Disk No. DL16

7th Edition: May 1997 (YG)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 1995 Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 701510-01E 1
 Checking the Contents of the Package

Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument. If the wrong
instrument or accessories have been delivered, if some accessories are missing or if they
appear abnormal, contact the dealer from which you purchased them.

Main Body
Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the rear panel match
those on your order.

MODEL

SUFFIX

NO.

Made in Japan

MODEL (Type Name)

701505 : DL1520, 701515 : DL1520L, 701510 : DL1540, 701520 : DL1540L

SUFFIX (Suffix Code)

Suffix Code Specifications

Power voltage
(For DL1540, DL1540L)
-1 100-120 VAC/200-240 VAC
-5 100-120 VAC/200-240 VAC
(For DL1520, DL1520L)
-1 100-120 V AC
-5 200-240 V AC
Power cord -D UL/CSA Standards Power Cord (Part No.: A1006WD)
[Maximum Rated Voltage: 125 V, Maximum Rated Current: 7 A]
-F VDE Standard Power Cord (Part No.: A1009WD)
[Maximum Rated Voltage: 250 V, Maximum Rated Current: 10 A]
-Q BS Standard Power Cord (Part No.: A1054WD)
[Maximum Rated Voltage: 250 V, Maximum Rated Current: 10 A]
-R SAA Standard Power Cord (Part No.: A1024WD)
[Maximum Rated Voltage: 240 V, Maximum Rated Current: 10 A]
Interface (On DL1520, select from C1, C2 and C3. On DL1520L, select from C1, C2, C3 and C4.)
-C1 GP-IB Interface
-C2 RS-232-C Interface
-C3 GP-IB & Centronics Interface
-C4 GP-IB & SCSI Interface
Options /B5 Built-in printer (real-time printing function)
/E1 With two additional 150 MHz probes
(Available on DL1540/DL1540L)
/F1 Additional trigger (OR, Pattern, Width)
(Available on DL1540/DL1540L)
Example: DL1540, UL/CSA standard power cord and full options → 701510-1-D/B5/E1/F1
*GP-IB interface comes standard with DL1540/DL1540L.

NO. (Instrument No.)

When contacting the dealer from which you purchased your instrument, please quote the
instrument No.

2 IM 701510-01E
 Checking the Contents of the Package

Standard Accessories
The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument. Make sure that all
items are present and undamaged.
Power cord (one of the following power cords
is supplied according to the instrument's suffix codes)

UL/CSA standard VDE standard BS standard SAA standard

A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD

D F Q R

∗
Printer connecting cable 1 150MHz probe Printer roll SCSI
∗2 ∗3 ∗
adapter 4
(centronics connector to (10:1, 1:1 selectable)(x2) chart
D-sub socket) 700998 B9850NX B9916TD
B9916TB

Power supply fuse Rubber feet(x4) Front cover

(in fuse holder) A9088ZMx2 B9920BT
For DL1540/DL1540L,
for suffix code -1 & -5: A1351EF
For DL1520/DL1520L,
for suffix code -1: A1436EF
for suffix code -5: A1349EF

Soft case User's manual (this manual) (x1)

B9918EZ Communication interface manual (x1)
Operation guide (x1)

*1 Supplied with DL1520/DL1520L and suffix code -C3 only.

*2 For DL1540/DL1540L, a total of four passive probes are supplied (if the two optional probes
are included).
*3 A roll chart will be supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a built-in printer.
*4 Supplied only with DL1520L with suffix code -C4.

IM 701510-01E 3
Checking the Contents of the Package

Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories are available. On receiving these optional accessories,
make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are
undamaged.
If you have any questions regarding optional accessories, or if you wish to place an order,
contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument.

Carrying case
700915
Mini-clip convertor BNC adapter Ground lead 50 Ω Through
B9852CR B9852CS B9852CT terminator
700976

Optional Spare Parts

The following optional spare parts are available. On receiving these optional spare parts,
make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are
undamaged.
If you have any questions regarding optional spare parts, or if you wish to place an order,
contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument.

Part Name Part No. Minimum Q’ty Remarks

150 MHz passive probe 700998 1 Input impedance: 10 MΩ, Length: 1.5 m
Roll chart B9850NX 5 Thermo-sensible paper, Total length: 30 m
Power supply fuse A1351EF 2 Time lag, 3.15 A, 250 V
(for DL1540, DL1540L) (for suffix code -1 and -5)
Power supply fuse A1436EF 5 Time lag, 3 A, 250 V (for suffix code -1)
(for DL1520, DL1520L) A1349EF 2 Time lag, 2 A, 250 V (for suffix code -5)

Note
It is recommended that the packing box be kept in a safe place. The box can be used when you need to
transport the instrument somewhere.

4 IM 701510-01E
 Safety Precautions

This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument (provided with terminal for protective
grounding). The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of
operation, service, and repair of this instrument. If this instrument is used in a manner not
specified in this manual, the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired. Also,
YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply
with these requirements.

The following symbols are used on this instrument.

To avoid injury, death of personnel or damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to
an explanation in the User’s Manual or Service manual.

Function Grounding Terminal (This terminals shold not be used as a “Protective grounding
terminal”.)

Alternating current

ON(power)

OFF(power)

In-position of a bistable push control

Out-position of a bistable push control

IM 701510-01E 5
Safety Precaustions

WARNING Power Supply

Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning
on the power.

Power Cord and Plug

To prevent an electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power supply cord supplied
by YOKOGAWA. The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective
grounding terminal. Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without
protective grounding.

Protective Grounding
Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock before
turning on the power.

Necessity of Protective Grounding

Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the
wiring of protective grounding terminal. Doing so poses a potential shock hazard.

Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse

Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be
defective.

Fuse
To prevent a fire, make sure to use fuses with specified standard (current, voltage,
type). Before replacing the fuses, turn off the power and disconnect the power
source. Do not use a different fuse or short-circuit the fuse holder.

Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere

Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors.
Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety
hazard.

Do not Remove any Covers

There are some areas with high voltage. Do not remove any cover if the power
supply is connected. The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only.

External Connection
To ground securely, connect the protective grounding before connecting to
measurement or control unit.

Handling the CRT

This CRT is in conformity with the requirements specified in CSA and VDE
standards. However please avoid rough handling or jarring of the instrument to
prevent possible CRT implosion. Breakage of the CRT may cause a high velocity
scattering of glass fragments.

6 IM 701510-01E
 How to Use this Manual

Structure of the Manual

This User’s Manual consists of 16 chapters, an Appendix and an Index as described below.

Chapter Title Description

1 Functions Describes measurement principles and functions. Although this
section does not give a description of the operating methods, it
will help you to understand the basic operations.
2 Name and Use of Gives the name of each part and describes how to use it.
Each Part The corresponding reference pages for panel keys and the
rotary knobs are also given.
3 Before Starting Describes points to watch during use and describes how to
Observation and install the instrument, connect the power cord, turn the power
Measurement of switch ON/OFF and connect probes as well as how to set the
Waveforms date and time.
4 Common Operations Describes the operations used to make settings, such as start/
stop acquisition, auto set-up and initialization of each setting as
well as operations, such as snapshot, clear trace and calibration,
that are used frequently during operation.
5 Setting the Vertical Describes how to turn channels ON/OFF, how to make
and Horizontal Axes settings, such as input coupling, probe attenuation and vertical
sensitivity, that are related to the vertical axis (voltage axis), as
well as how to make settings related to the horizontal axis (time
axis).
6 Activating a Trigger Describes trigger setting operations, such as those for setting
trigger mode, trigger type, trigger source and trigger level, that
enable you to determine acquisition timing.
7 Changing Acquisition Describes how to make acquisition condition settings, such as
and Display acquisition mode, sampling mode, input filter and hysteresis,
Conditions as well as how to make display condition settings, such as
waveform expansion, interpolation, accumulation, X-Y display
and graticule.
8 Analyzing Waveforms Describes how to measure waveforms using cursors, perform
automatic measurement of waveform parameters and waveform
math, and how to display the power spectrum obtained by FFT
computation.
9 Performing a Describes how to perform a GO/NO-GO action by setting the
GO/NO-GO Action waveform zone or setting limits for waveform parameters, then
detecting whether the input signal waveform is within the
specified range (zone or limits).
10 Outputting Displayed Describes how to output displayed waveforms (screen
Waveforms and hardcopy) and set-up information to the built-in printer or
Setting Parameters plotter connected to the GP-IB interface.
to the Printer/Plotter
11 Storing and Recalling Describes how to store displayed waveforms or settings in the
Data from the Internal internal memory, how to recall stored waveform data and
Memory display the waveforms, and how to recall settings and change
them.
12 Saving and Loading Describes how to save waveform data or set-up data to a floppy
Data from a Floppy disk, how to load saved data, how to initialize a floppy disk and
Disk how to delete data.
13 Saving and Loading Describes how to save waveform data or set-up data to a SCSI
Data from a SCSI device, how to load saved data, how to initialize a SCSI device
Device and how to delete data.
14 Other Operations Describes operations such as those required for trigger output.
15 Troubleshooting, Describes how to diagnose the cause of trouble and how to
Maintenance and correct it, as well as describing each message that may appear
Inspection on the screen and how to perform a self test.
16 Specifications Describes the specifications.
Appendix Shows a menu map, describes the relationship between the time
axis, sample rate and record length, and describes the data
format which must be specified when waveform data is saved.
Index Important terms used in this manual with corresponding
reference page numbers are given.

IM 701510-01E 7
 Conventions Used in this Manual

Unit
k ............. Denotes “1000”. Example: 100kS/s
K ............. Denotes “1024” or “1002”.
• Example of when K indicates “1024” : 640 KB (storage capacity of a floppy
disk)
• Example of when K indicates “1002” : 100 KW (record length for
acquisition memory)

Used Characters
Alphanumerics enclosed in double quotation marks usually refer to characters and set values
that appear on the screen and panel.
The SHIFT + xxx key refers to first pressing the SHIFT key (the indicator above the SHIFT
key lights), and then pressing the xxx key to obtain another, specified, function.

Symbols Used
The following symbol marks are used in this User's Manual.

To avoid injury or death of personnel, or damage to the

instrument, the operator must refer to the User's Manual. In the
User's Manual, these symbols appear on the pages to which the
operator must refer.

Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the

WARNING danger of serious injury or death to the user.

Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the

CAUTION danger of minor or moderate injury to the user, or the damage to
the property.

Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the

instrument.

Symbol Marks Used for Descriptions of Operations

The following symbol marks are used in Chapters 3 to 14 to distinguish certain features in
descriptions.

Relevant Keys Indicates the relevant panel key which are necessary
to carry out the operation.

Operating Procedure Carry out steps in the order shown. The operating
procedures are given with the assumption that you are
not familiar with the operation. Thus, it may not be
necessary to carry out all the steps when changing
settings.

Keys and Procedure Shows the above mentioned relevant keys and the
operating procedure in one block.

Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the

operation. A detailed description of the function is not
provided. For a detailed description of the function,
refer to Chapter 1.

8 IM 701510-01E
 Contents
1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
Checking the Contents of the Package ......................................................................................... 2 2
Safety Precautions .......................................................................................................................................... 5
How to Use this Manual .............................................................................................................................. 7
Conventions Used in this Manual ...................................................................................................... 8 3

Chapter 1 Functions
4
1.1 System Configuration and Block Diagram ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes ................................................................................... 1-2
Input Coupling / Probe Attenuation ........................................................................................................ 1-2 5
Inverted Waveform Display / Vertical Sensitivity ....................................................................................... 1-3
Vertical Position of the Waveform / Time Axis .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Setting a Trigger ......................................................................................................................... 1-8 6
Trigger Type / Trigger Source / Trigger Level ........................................................................................... 1-8
Trigger Mode / Action-On Trigger / Trigger Coupling ................................................................................. 1-10
7
HF Rejection / Trigger Position / Trigger Delay / Trigger Hold-off ................................................................. 1-11
1.4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions ........................................................................ 1-12
Acquisition Modes / Sampling Mode ...................................................................................................... 1-12 8
Record Length Input Filter / Expanded Waveform ...................................................................................... 1-13
Sequential Store .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14
History Memory / Display Interpolation .................................................................................................. 1-15 9
Accumulated Waveform Display / X-Y Waveform Display ........................................................................... 1-16
....................................................................................................................... 1-17
Other Display Settings
10
1.5 Analyzing the Waveform ........................................................................................................... 1-18
Cursor Measurements / Automated Measurements / Linear Scaling ................................................................. 1-18
Waveform Math / Power Spectrum Display .............................................................................................. 1-19 11
1.6 Other Useful Functions .............................................................................................................. 1-20
Auto Set-up / Initialization / Snapshot / Clear Trace / GO/NO-GO Determination ............................................... 1-20
Making Hardcopy Print-outs / Real-time Printing / Storing and Recalling ......................................................... 1-21
12
Saving and Loading Data from a Floppy Disk / Saving and Loading Data from a SCSI Device / GP-IB and RS-232-C . 1-22

13
Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part
2.1 Front Panel / Rear Panel / Top View .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Operation keys / Rotary Knob ................................................................................................... 2-2 14
2.3 Display ....................................................................................................................................... 2-5

Chapter 3 Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms 15

3.1 Precautions During Use ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Installing the Main Unit ............................................................................................................. 3-2 16
3.3 Connecting the SCSI Cable (for DL1520L with suffix code -C4) ............................................. 3-3
3.4 Connecting the Power Cord ....................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Turning the Power Switch ON/OFF ........................................................................................... 3-6 App
3.6 Connecting a Probe .................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.7 Compensating the Probe (Phase Correction) ............................................................................. 3-8
Index
3.8 Setting the Date and Time .......................................................................................................... 3-9

IM 701510-01E 9
 Contents

Chapter 4 Common Operations

4.1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition ............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set-up Function ............................................................ 4-2
4.3 Initializing Settings .................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 Halting a Waveform and Erasing the Halted Waveform (Snap Shot and Clear Trace) .............. 4-5
4.5 Performing Calibration .............................................................................................................. 4-6
4.6 Setting Values ............................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.7 Entering Characters using the Keyboard .................................................................................... 4-8

Chapter 5 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

5.1 Turning Display of Input Signal Waveforms ON/OFF .............................................................. 5-1
5.2 Setting the Input Coupling ......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Setting the Probe Attenuation .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.4 Inverting a Waveform ................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.5 Setting the Vertical Sensitivity ................................................................................................... 5-6
5.6 Changing the Waveform’s Vertical Position .............................................................................. 5-7
5.7 Selecting the Timebase ............................................................................................................... 5-8
5.8 Setting the Time Axis ................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.9 Changing the Waveform’s Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 5-12

Chapter 6 Activating a Trigger

6.1 Relationship between Trigger Type and Trigger Source/Slope/Level ....................................... 6-1
6.2 Setting the Edge Trigger ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3 Setting the Window Trigger ....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4 Setting the TV Trigger ................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.5 Setting the OR Trigger (Optional for DL1540/DL1540L) ......................................................... 6-7
6.6 Setting the Pattern Trigger (Optional for DL1540/DL1540L) ................................................... 6-8
6.7 Setting the Width Trigger (Optional for DL1540/DL1540L) .................................................... 6-10
6.8 Setting the Trigger Mode ........................................................................................................... 6-12
6.9 Setting the Action-On Trigger .................................................................................................... 6-14
6.10 Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection ......................................................................... 6-16
6.11 Changing the Trigger Position ................................................................................................... 6-17
6.12 Setting the Trigger Delay ........................................................................................................... 6-18
6.13 Setting the Hold-off Time .......................................................................................................... 6-19

Chapter 7 Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

7.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode, Sampling Mode, and Record Length for DL1520L/DL1540L ... 7-1
7.2 Setting the Input Filter ............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Zooming the Waveform ............................................................................................................. 7-4
7.4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential Store Function (for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L) .. 7-7
7.5 Using the History Memory Function (for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L) ................................. 7-9
7.6 Changing the Interpolation Settings ........................................................................................... 7-11
7.7 Displaying an Accumulated Waveform ...................................................................................... 7-12
7.8 Displaying an X-Y Waveform .................................................................................................... 7-13
7.9 Changing the Graticule, Scale and %Marker Settings ............................................................... 7-14
7.10 Turning the Waveform Information Display ON/OFF ............................................................... 7-15
7.11 Changing the Screen Intensity ................................................................................................... 7-16

10 IM 701510-01E
Contents

Chapter 8 Analyzing Waveforms

8.1 Measuring a V-T Waveform using Cursors ................................................................................ 8-1 1
8.2 Measuring an X-Y Waveform using Cursors ............................................................................. 8-5
8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically ...................................................................... 8-7
8.4 Using the Linear Scaling Function ............................................................................................. 8-14 2
8.5 Performing Waveform Math (Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication) ................................. 8-16
8.6 Displaying the Power Spectrum (Performing FFT Computation) ............................................. 8-18
3
8.7 Measuring the Power Spectrum using Cursors .......................................................................... 8-19

Chapter 9 Performing a GO/NO-GO Action 4

9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone ................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters ........................................................ 9-8
9.3 Using the GO/NO-GO Signal Output Function (for DL1540/DL1540L) ................................. 9-13
5

Chapter 10 Outputting Displayed Waveforms and Set-up Information to the 6

Printer/Plotter
10.1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built-in Printer ....................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built-in Printer ............... 10-3 7
10.3 Real-Time Printing using the Optional Built-in Printer ............................................................. 10-6
10.4 Connecting an External Plotter .................................................................................................. 10-7
10.5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional Information using an External Plotter ............. 10-8
8
10.6 Entering a Comment .................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer 9
(for DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -C3) .......................................................................... 10-11

Chapter 11 Storing and Recalling Data from the Internal Memory 10

11.1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms ............................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters .................................................................................. 11-3
11
Chapter 12 Saving and Loading Data from a Floppy Disk
12.1 Floppy Disks .............................................................................................................................. 12-1 12
12.2 Formatting a Floppy Disk .......................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data ......................................................................................... 12-4
12.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters .................................................................................... 12-9 13
12.5 Saving Screen Image Data ......................................................................................................... 12-11
12.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data .......................................................................................... 12-14
14
Chapter 13 Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4) 15
13.1 Selecting the SCSI Device ......................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Formatting the Media ................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data ......................................................................................... 13-4 16
13.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters .................................................................................... 13-9
13.5 Saving Screen Image Data ......................................................................................................... 13-11
App
13.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data .......................................................................................... 13-14

Index

IM 701510-01E 11
 Contents

Chapter 14 Other Operations

14.1 Using a Trigger Output Signal (for DL1540/DL1540L) ........................................................... 14-1
14.2 Downloading Waveform Data to an AG Arbitrary Waveform Generator .................................. 14-2
14.3 Checking the System Condition ................................................................................................. 14-3
14.4 Adjusting the Printer Density ..................................................................................................... 14-4

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection

15.1 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ..................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 Self Test ...................................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4 Replacing the Power Supply Fuse ............................................................................................. 15-8
15.5 Recommended Parts for Replacement ....................................................................................... 15-9

Chapter 16 Specifications
16.1 Input Section .............................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.2 Trigger Section ........................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.3 Time Axis ................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.4 Display ....................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.5 Functions .................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.6 Rear Panel Input/Output Section ................................................................................................ 16-5
16.7 Communication Interface ........................................................................................................... 16-6
16.8 Built-in Printer ........................................................................................................................... 16-7
16.9 Built-in Floppy Disk Drive ........................................................................................................ 16-7
16.10 General Specifications ............................................................................................................... 16-8
16.11 External Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 16-10

Appendix
Appendix 1 Menu Map ....................................................................................................................... App-1
Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length
(for DL1520/DL1540) .................................................................................................... App-2
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length
(for DL1520L/DL1540L) ............................................................................................... App-5
Appendix 4 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform ..................................................................... App-11
Appendix 5 Output Data Format used When Saving Waveform Data (Example DL1540L) ............ App-12

Index

12 IM 701510-01E
 2.1 Front Panel / Rear Panel / Top View

Front Panel (2 channels are provided with DL1520/DL1520L.)

Time axis setting knob
→Page 5-10 2

Name and Use of Each Part

Floppy disk drive
Saving and loading of data from the
floppy disk
CRT screen →Chapter 12
Description of display contents
→Page 2-5 Rotary knob
Used to enter setting values and selections

CAL signal output terminal !

Front panel keys
Outputs a calibration signal for a probe.
Description of each key
→Page 3-6
→Pages 2-2 to 2-4
Power switch Function grounding terminal
Description of ON/OFF operation Used to connect the ground line to
→Page 3-4 calibrate a probe.
This key is not provided with Input terminals !
DL1520/DL1520L. Used to connect a probe.
→Page 3-5
(For DL1540/DL1540L,
CH1 to CH4 input terminals are provided.
For DL1520/DL1520L, CH1 and CH2 input
terminals and an external trigger /external
clock terminal are provided.)

Rear Panel (Varies depending on the model. Refer to the their individual specifications.)
GP-IB connector
Used to connect an external plotter.
Connection method →Page 10-7
For a description of communications functions,
refer to the Communication Interface User's
Manual (IM 701510-11E).
(For DL1520/DL1520L, a RS-232-C connector is
provide depending on its specifications.)
Trigger output terminal !
How to use the trigger output signal
Connector for half →Page 14-1
pitch interface ! (Not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.)
(For DL1520/DL1520L,
External trigger/clock input terminal !
a Centronics
Description of external trigger →Page 6-3
connector is provided
Description of external clock →Page 5-8
depending on its
(Provided on the front panel in the case of
specifications.)
DL1520/DL1520L.)
Vent holes Vent holes
Power connector !
Connection method →Page 3-5

Power supply fuse

For fuse replacement →Page 15-8

Support
Use the support to use this instrument with
the display facing upwards.
Top View Rear panel

Built-in printer (optional)

How to output data to the printer
→Chapter 10

Vent holes
Handle
Hold the instrument by these handles
when you carry it.

Front panel

IM 701510-01E 2-1
 2.2 Operation Keys / Rotary Knob

Operation keys provided with DL1540/DL1540L are shown below. For DL1520/DL1520L,
keys relating to CH3 and CH4 and HISTORY key are not provided.
Keys and Rotary Knob used for Various Functions
CLEAR TRACE key (Page 4-5) ESC key
Deletes the snapshot waveform or accumulated Deletes the currently displayed menu.
waveform. Also used to re-start averaging and
repetitive time sampling. RESET key
Resets the settings made using the
Soft keys rotary knob to their default settings.
SNAP SHOT
Used to make settings corresponding to the soft key SNAP SHOT key (Page 4-5)
CLEAR menu displayed above the keys.
TRACE Retains the waveform which is displayed
ESC when this key is pressed, even if updating
is performed.
FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET SELECT key
AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY Confirms the items and characters
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER selected.
ON/OFF TRIG'D

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM
Rotary knob
TYPE MODE
Used to set values, move the cursor,
7 8 9 ACTION
SELECT and select the desired items.
V/DIV TIME/DIV
LEVEL/ POSITION/
SOURCE DELAY

4 5
POSITION
6 <> key
Used to shift from one digit to the next
COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP
of the value you are setting using the
1 2
INPUT
3
REMOTE
rotary knob.
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT

0 +/- KEYBOARD FILE MENU START/STOP key (Page 4-1)

INITIALIZE key (Page 4-4) Starts or stops acquisition.
SHIFT+MISC (KEYBOARD key) The indicator on this key is lit during
Displays the initialization menu which (Page 4-7) acquisition.
can be used to reset the settings to Displays a keyboard which enables you
their default values. to enter values directly. SHIFT key
AUTO-SETUP key (Page 4-2) CAL key (Page 4-6) Used to operate functions written in blue
Displays the auto setup menu which Displays the calibration execution menu. over/under the operation keys.
can be used to execute auto setup.

Keys and Rotary Knob used for Setting the Vertical/Horizontal Axis
V/DIV key (Page 5-6)
Displays the voltage axis sensitivity setting
menu for each channel. For DL1520/DL1520L, keys relating to CH3 and CH4 are not provided.
CH key (Page 5-1)
Turns ON/OFF display of the waveform for each channel.
The indicator above the key is lit when the display is ON. For DL1520/1520L, keys relating to CH3 and CH4 are not provided.
SNAP SHOT
POSITION key (Page 5-12)
CLEAR
TRACE
Displays the horizontal position setting menu.
ESC

FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET

AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER

ON/OFF TRIG'D

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM
Rotary knob
TYPE MODE
Used to make vertical axis sensitivity
7 8 9
V/DIV TIME/DIV
ACTION
SELECT (V/div), waveform vertical/horizontal
LEVEL/ POSITION/ position and offset voltage settings.
SOURCE DELAY

4 5 6
POSITION

COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP

1 2 3
INPUT REMOTE
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT

KEYBOARD FILE MENU

0 +/-

Time axis setting knob (TIME/DIV)

INPUT key (Pages 5-2 to 5-5) (Page 5-10)
Sets the input coupling, probe attenuation, Used to change the time axis scale.
inverted display, and acquisition hold. For DL1520/DL1520L, keys relating to CH3 and CH4 are not provided.

POSITION key (Page 5-7)

Displays the vertical position setting menu
for each displayed waveform. For DL1520/DL1520L, keys relating to CH3 and CH4 are not provided.

2-2 IM 701510-01E
 2.2 Operation Keys / Rotary Knob

Keys and Rotary Knob used for Making Trigger Settings

TRIG’D indicator
Lights up when a trigger is activated.
MODE key (Page 6-12)
Displays the trigger mode selection menu.
SHIFT+MODE(ACTION) key (Page 6-14)
2
TYPE key
Displays the trigger type selection Displays the action-on-trigger selection menu.

Name and Use of Each Part

menu. SNAP SHOT

CLEAR
TRACE

ESC
RESET key
Resets the settings made using the
rotary knob to their default settings.
FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET
AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER

ON/OFF TRIG'D

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM
Rotary knob
TYPE MODE
Used to set the trigger level, trigger
7 8 9
V/DIV TIME/DIV
ACTION
SELECT position and trigger delay.
LEVEL/ POSITION/
SOURCE DELAY

4 5
POSITION
6 <> key
Used to shift from one digit to the
COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP
next of the value you are setting using
1 2
INPUT
3
REMOTE
the rotary knob.
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT

KEYBOARD FILE MENU

0 +/-

LEVER/SOURCE key POSITION/DELAY key (Pages 6-17, 6-18)

Displays the trigger source selection Displays the trigger position/trigger delay setting menu.
menu.

COUPLING key (Page 6-16) HOLD OFF key (Page 6-19)

Displays the trigger coupling setting Displays the holdoff time setting menu.
menu.

Keys and Rotary Knob used for Setting Acquisition and Display Conditions
DISPLAY key (Pages 7-7 to 7-13)
Displays the waveforms for the sequential store and history
FILTER key (Page 7-3)
memory, and the setting menu for interpolation, X-Y and
Displays the input filter setting menu.
accumulate settings.
The indicator above the key is lit when
a band limit is set. SHIFT+DISPLAY(DISPLAY FORM) key (Pages 7-14 to 7-16)
Displays the display condition setting menu to make display
interpolation, graticule/scale % marker and intensity settings.
SNAP SHOT

CLEAR
TRACE

ESC
RESET key
Resets the settings made using the rotary
knob to their default settings.
FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET
AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER Rotary knob

ON/OFF TRIG'D
Used to set the number of execution times
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM TYPE MODE for averaging, expansion rate and position,
7 8 9 ACTION
accumulate time and brightness of the screen.
V/DIV SELECT
TIME/DIV
LEVEL/ POSITION/
SOURCE DELAY

4 5
POSITION
6
HISTORY
<> key
Used to shift from one digit to the next of the
COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP
value you are setting using the rotary knob.
1 2 3
INPUT REMOTE
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT

KEYBOARD FILE MENU

0 +/-
ACQ key (Page 7-1)
ZOOM key (Page 7-4) Displays the menu used to make acquisition
Displays the expansion setting menu. mode and sampling mode settings.
SHIFT+ACQ(HISTORY) key (Page 7-9)
For DL1520L, displays the history memory setting menu.
For DL1520L, "HISTORY" character indicated over ACQ key
HISTORY key (Page 7-9)
Displays the history memory setting menu.
(Not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.)

IM 701510-01E 2-3
2.2 Operation Keys / Rotary Knob

Keys and Rotary Knob used for Analysis of Waveforms

MEASURE key (Page 8-6)
Displays the setting menu for automated
measurement of waveform parameters.

CURSOR key (Pages 8-1, 8-5 and 8-19)

Displays the setting menu for cursor measurement.
RESET key
SNAP SHOT Resets the settings made using the
rotary knob to their default values.
CLEAR
TRACE

ESC

FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET SELECT key

AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY Confirms the items and characters
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER selected.
ON/OFF TRIG'D

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM
Rotary knob
TYPE MODE
Used to select cursor position, waveform
7 8 9
V/DIV TIME/DIV
ACTION
SELECT parameters, linear scaling, phase shift,
LEVEL/ POSITION/ FFT computation, etc.
SOURCE DELAY

4 5
POSITION
6 <> key
Used to shift from one digit to the next of
COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP
the value you are setting using the rotary
1 2
INPUT
3
REMOTE
knob.
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT

KEYBOARD FILE MENU

0 +/-
MATH key (Page 8-16)
GO/NO-GO key (Pages 9-1 and 9-8) Displays the waveform computation menu.
Displays the GO/NO-GO setting menu.
SHIFT + MATH(FFT) key (Page 8-18)
Displays the FFT computation menu.

MISC key (Page 8-14)

Used to set the linear scaling function.

Keys and Rotary Knob used for Other Operations

LOCAL key
Clears the remote state. The REMOTE indicator
is lit while remote mode is active.
Refer to the Communication Interface User's
Manual (IM 701510-11E).
RESET key
Resets the settings made using the
rotary knob to their default values.
SNAP SHOT

CLEAR
TRACE

ESC

FFT DISPLAY FORM RESET SELECT key

AUTO-SETUP INITIALIZE FILTER MEASURE CURSOR GO/NO-GO MATH DISPLAY Used to input the file name, for selection
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL TRIGGER and confirmation.
ON/OFF TRIG'D

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 POSITION ZOOM
Rotary knob
TYPE MODE
Used to select the desired setting items
7 8 9
V/DIV TIME/DIV
ACTION
SELECT or values.
LEVEL/ POSITION/
SOURCE DELAY

4 5 6
POSITION

COUPLING HOLD OFF ACQ START/STOP COPY key (Chapter 10, Page 12-11)
1 2 3 Used for outputting to internal printer,
INPUT REMOTE
LOCAL CAL MISC HISTORY STORE/RECALL COPY SHIFT
external plotter, hard copy of screen image
data, etc.
KEYBOARD FILE MENU
0 +/-
SHIFT + COPY(MENU)
(Chapter 10, Page 12-11)
Displays the setting menu for outputting to
the internal printer, external plotter, and for
hard copy of screen image data, etc.
MISC key (Pages 14-2 to 14-4, 15-7) STORE/RECALL key (Chapter 11)
Displays the MISC menu used to make communications, date Displays the store/recall menu used to store or recall displayed
and time settings, confirm system condition, perform a self waveforms and setting parameters from the internal memory.
test and make system configuration setting. SHIFT + STORE/RECALL(FILE) key (Chapter 12 and 13)
Displays the setting menu used to save/load data to/from the
floppy disk or the SCSI device. The menu for operating the SCSI
device is displayed only on the DL1520L with suffix code -C4.

2-4 IM 701510-01E
 2.3 Display

An example of screen displayed on DL1540/DL1540L is shown below. For DL1520/

DL1520L, waveforms and data relating to CH3 and CH4 are not displayed.
Normal Waveform Display
2
Information concerning waveforms →Page 7-15

Name and Use of Each Part

CH2 . . . Signal waveform of channel 2
20V . . . Voltage axis sensitivity is 20V/div
DC . . . Input coupling
10:1 . . . Probe attenuation

Information concerning waveform acquisiton

No display . . . . . . acquisition in progress
Stopped
Waiting for trigger
Trigger position
Date and time →Page 3-7

Time axis setting →Page 5-10

Sample rate → App.2/App.3
In case of the repetitive sampling mode,
Trigger level mark [REP] is added

Acquisition mode → Page 7-1

NORM . . . Normal mode
ENV . . . Envelope mode
AVG . . . Averaging mode
Trace No.

Ground level mark Graticule → Page 7-14

Rotary knob menu

Shows values and settings which can
be adjusted by rotary knob

Soft key menu

Press the corresponding key below
when you want to change any setting
(For DL1520/DL1520L,
CH2 and CH3 are not displayed.)

Automated Measurements → Refer to page 8-7.

T1 cursor T2 cursor

Measurement
values

Trace No.

Measurement items or delay

between channels

IM 701510-01E 2-5
2.3 Display

Expanded Display → Refer to page 7-4.

Expansion (zoom) box

Pre-zoom waveform

Time axis setting of the

expanded waveform
Expanded waveform

Expansion rate

Expansion setting menu

Recalled Waveform → Refer to page 11-1.

Channel No. switches to "MEM" when a recalled
waveform is displayed.
The voltage axis sensitivity of the recalled waveform
is displayed as well.

Recalled waveform

Input signal waveform

Destination selection menu

Recall menu
(For DL1520/DL1520L, LOAD3 and LOAD4 are not displayed.)

2-6 IM 701510-01E
 3.1 Precautions During Use

Safety Precautions
When using this instrument, thoroughly read the “Safety Precautions” given on page 4 and
5. In addition, pay attention to the following points:

Do not remove the cover from the instrument

Some parts of the instrument use high voltages, which are extremely dangerous. When the 3
instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment, contact your dealer or nearest

Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms

YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

Unusual occurrences
If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument, turn OFF the power and
unplug the power cord immediately. Contact your dealer or the nearest YOKOGAWA
representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

Power cord
Nothing should be placed on the power cord; also, it should be kept away from any heat
sources. When unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet, never pull the cord itself.
Always hold the plug and pull it. If the power cord is damaged, contact your dealer. Refer to
page 2 for the part number to quote when placing an order.

General Handling Precautions

Never place anything on top of the instrument
Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument,
otherwise a breakdown may occur.

Do not subject the input terminals or connecting cables to shock

Shock to the input terminals or connecting cables may turn into electrical noise and enter
the instrument via the signal lines.

When the instrument is not going to be used for a long period

Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.

CRT Screen
It is recommended to use weak contrast settings so as not to burn in the screen.

When moving the instrument

Disconnect the power cord and connecting cables.
Always carry the instrument by the handles or carry it
with both hands as shown on the right.
Note that the chart paper might show some
discoloration due to friction after the instrument is
moved with the roll paper installed. In such a case,
we recommend to remove and re-install the chart
paper again. For details on the procedure, refer to
page 10-1.

Cleaning
For cleaning the case and the operation panel, unplug the power cord first, then gently wipe
with a dry, soft and clean cloth. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner, since
these may cause discoloration or damage.

IM 701510-01E 3-1
 3.2 Installing the Main Unit
Installation Position
Place the instrument in a flat, horizontal position as shown in the figure below. To tilt the
screen slightly forwards, use the support, as shown below also.
When using the support, pull it forwards until it is at right angles to the bottom of the
instrument, and lock it. If you are installing the instrument in a slippery place, attach the
rubber stoppers to all feet to prevent the instrument from sliding.

Support

Installation Conditions
The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met.

Ambient temperature and humidity

Ambient temperature: 5 to 40 °C
To ensure high measurement accuracy, ambient temperature should be 23 ±2 °C.
Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH
No condensation should be present. To ensure high measurement accuracy, ambient
humidity should be 55 ±10% RH.
Flat, horizontal locations
Place the instrument in a stable location, which is horizontal in each direction. Operating the
instrument in an unstable location may hinder recording of the printer and accurate
measurement.
Well-ventilated location
Vent holes are situated on the left side of the instrument. In addition, vent holes for the
cooling fan are also situated in the rear panel. To prevent a rise in the internal temperature,
the vent holes should not be blocked and sufficient clearance should be maintained around
them.

5 cm or more

5 cm 5 cm
or or 2 cm
more more or
more

If the instrument is equipped with a built-in printer or when the GP-IB cable is connected,
make sure to allow sufficient space for operations in addition to the space for the vent holes.
Never install the instrument in any of the following places.
• In direct sunlight or near heat sources
• Where an excessive amount of soot, steam, dust or corrosive gases are present.
• Near strong magnetic field sources
• Near high voltage equipment or power lines
• Where the level of mechanical vibration is high
• In an unstable place
Note
Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient
temperature and humidity are higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. In such cases allow the
instrument to acclimatize to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation.

3-2 IM 701510-01E
 3.3 Connecting the SCSI cable (for DL1520L with
suffix code -C4)
Name, position and pin cofigurationo of the SCSI cable connector
• Name : OPTION
• Position : Real panel of DL1520L
• Pin configuration
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name 3
1 to 12 GND 32 -DB6 43 -BSY

Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms

13 NC 33 -DB7 44 -ACK
14 to 25 GND 34 -DBP 45 -RST
26 -DB0 35 to 37 GND 46 -MSG
27 -DB1 38 TERMPWR 47 -SEL
28 -DB2 39,40 GND 48 -C/D
29 -DB3 41 -ATN 49 -REQ
30 -DB4 42 GND 50 -I/O
31 -DB5

OPTION
25 24 23 3 2 1 Pin No.

50 49 48 28 27 26

(Rear panel)
Other necessary equipment
SCSI Device
SCSI devices which can send and receive data over SCSI and can set the ID number to "5"
can be connected the instrument. There are exceptions as in the case when the media used
on the SCSI device is formatted with another equipment such as a PC, or the pin
configuration of the connector is different. Refer to section 16.7, for the SCSI specification.
Also, for information on general precautions in using the SCSI device, refer to the
instruction manual for that device.

SCSI cable
SCSI cables should have the connector shape and pin configuration which match the
"OPTION" connector on the rear panel of the DL1520L (refer to the figure above). They
should be less than 3 m long with a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Ω. Also,
attach a ferrite core (TDK:ZCAT2035-0930A) on each end of the cable.

Terminator
Some SCSI devices require terminators. Follow the instruction manual for the SCSI device.

Note
DL1540/DL1540L with software (ROM) version 1.20 or later can save/load data from the SCSI device
through the SCSI interface unit 700930 (sold separately). For details, refer to the instruction manual for
the SCSI interface unit 700930, IM700930-01E.

IM 701510-01E 3-3
3.3 Connecting the SCSI cable (for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)

Connecting the SCSI cable

CAUTION • When connecting or disconnecting the SCSI cable, turn the power switches
OFF on all equipment. Not doing so may cause malfunction, or damage the
equipment.
• Never short the connector pins on any equipment or externally apply
voltage to them. It may damage the equipment.

Before connecting
1. Make sure to read the instruction manuals thoroughly and have a good understanding on
all equipment being connected beforehand.
2. Turn the power switches OFF on all equipment that are being connected.

Connecting DL1520L and the SCSI device

3. Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the connector "OPTION" on the rear panel of this
unit.
4. Connect the other end of the SCSI cable to the connector on the SCSI device.
5. Set the ID number of the SCSI device to "5."

DL1520L digital oscilloscope (suffix code -C4)

SCSI device
"OPTION"
connector

SCSI cable
(To be provided by the customer)

Note
DL1520L with suffix code -C4 can connect one SCSI device to the "OPTION" connector.

3-4 IM 701510-01E
 3.4 Connecting the Power Cord

Before Connecting the Power

Make sure that you perform the following steps before connecting the power. Failure to do
so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument.

WARNING • Connect the power cord after confirming that the voltage of the power
3
supply complies to the rated electric power voltage for this instrument.
• Connect the power cord after confirming that the power switch is OFF.

Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms

• Always use protective ground to prevent electric shock. Connect the
accessory power cord to a power outlet with grounding terminal.
• Do not use non-grounding extension cords or other measures that defect
the protective grounding.
• Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding,
otherwise the protection feature will be negated.

Connecting the Power Cord

1. Make sure that the main power switch is OFF.
2. Plug the power cord into the power connector socket on the rear panel of the instrument.
3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet that meets the following
specifications. The AC outlet must be of 3-pin type with a protective grounding
terminal.

Item DL1540, DL1540L DL1520, DL1520L

Suffix code -1 and -5 Suffix code -1 Suffix code -5
Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC/220 to 240 VAC 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC
Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC/180 to 264 VAC 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC
Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz 48 to 63 Hz 48 to 63 Hz
Maximum power consumption 220 VA/280 VA 130 VA 140 VA
(when the built-in printer is used)
Typical power consumption 150 VA (at 100 VAC) 75 VA (at 100 VAC) 85 VA (at 200 VAC)
(when the built-in printer is not used) /190 VA (at 200 VAC)

3-pin AC outlet

Power cord
(supplied with instrument)

IM 701510-01E 3-5
 3.5 Turning the Power Switch ON/OFF

Points to be Checked before Turning ON the Power

Check that the instrument is correctly installed as described in Section 3.2
“Installing the Main Unit” (page 3-2).
Check that the SCSI cable is correctly connected as shown in Section 3.3
"Connecting the SCSI cable (for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)" (page 3-3).
Check that the power cord is correctly connected as shown in Section 3.4
“Connecting the Power Cord” (page 3-5).

Location of the Power Switch

The power switch is located on the front panel in the lower left corner.

Turning the Power ON/OFF

The power switch is a push-button type switch, and the power is turned ON and OFF
alternately as the switch is pressed.

OFF ON

The Order in Turning the Power Switches ON/OFF

When peripheral devices are connected to the half pitch interface connector of the this
instrument, turn ON the power switches on all peripheral devices first, then turn ON the
power switch of this instrument. When turning OFF the power, reverse the order.

Response at Power ON
Calibration (correction of the ground level and gain etc.) starts automatically when the
power switch is turned ON. Front panel keys are not operative during calibration (which
lasts approximately seven seconds). When calibration has been completed, the normal
waveform display screen will appear.

Note
If calibration does not start when the power is turned ON, or if the normal waveform display screen does
not appear, check the following points.
• Check that the power cord is plugged in properly.
• Check that the correct voltage is being supplied from the AC outlet. (Refer to page 3-5.)
• Check that the fuse is not blown. (Refer to page 15-8.)
• If the power switch is turned ON while the INITIALIZE key is pressed, all settings will be reset to the
factory settings. For details, refer to Section 4.3 “Initializing Settings” (page 4-4).
If there is still no power even after the above points have been checked, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA
representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

For Accurate Observation and Measurement

Turn the power switches ON and allow the unit to warm up for approximately 30 minutes.
Just before starting observation/measurement, perform calibration. The ground level and
gain etc. will be corrected. For a description of the calibration method, refer to Section 4.5
“Performing Calibration” (page 4-6).

Response at Power OFF

Settings made prior to turning OFF the power are retained. This allows display of
waveforms using these saved settings the next time the power is turned ON.

Note
The settings are backed up by a lithium battery. The battery lasts for approximately five years if it is used
at an ambient temperature of 23 °C. When the battery runs out, an icon Li appears in the top left of the
screen. In this case, the battery needs to be replaced immediately. The battery cannot be replaced by the
user. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

3-6 IM 701510-01E
 3.6 Connecting a Probe

Input Terminals
A probe (or an input cable such as a BNC cable) must be connected to one of the input
terminals (CH1 to CH4, CH1 and CH2 for DL1520/DL1520L) located on the lower section
of the front panel.
The input impedance is 1 MΩ ±1.5% and approximately 25 pF.
3
CAUTION The maximum input voltage is 250 V (DC + ACpeak) or 177 Vrms when the

Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms

frequency is 1 kHz or less. Never input a voltage exceeding this level, as it
could damage the input section of the instrument. If the frequency exceeds 1
kHz, the input section may be damaged even when the voltage is below 250 V.

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4
1MΩ/25pF ≤ 250Vpk

Example (DL1540/DL1540L)

Points to Note when Connecting a Probe

• When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time, perform phase correction of
the probe as described in the next section on page 3-7. Failure to do so may result in
unstable gain across different frequencies, thereby preventing correct measurement.
Calibration must be performed for each channel.
• If the object to be measured is connected to the instrument directly, without using a
probe, correct measurement cannot be performed due to the load effect.

Probe
Specifications for the probe (700998) supplied with the instrument (after
calibration)

Item Specifications Conditions

Setting 10:1 Setting 1:1
Input impedance/capacitance 10 MΩ ±2%/approx. 14 pF 1 MΩ ±1.5%/approx. 100 pF When used with this instrument
Attenuation ratio 10:1 ±2.5% — When used with this instrument
Frequency band DC to 150 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used with this instrument
Rise time 2.4 ns or less 58 ns or less When used with this instrument
Maximum input voltage 600 V (DC + ACpeak) *1 —
or 424 Vrms,
Frequency is 100 kHz or lower
Connector type BNC BNC —
Total length 1.5 m 1.5 m —
*1 When the probe's attenuation ratio is “1:1,” never input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage of this instrument.

When using a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument
To measure a signal which contains harmonics of approximately 150 MHz, use a probe with
a frequency band of 150 MHz or higher.
Correct measured values cannot be displayed if the probe’s attenuation ratio is not “1:1”,
“10:1”, “100:1” or “1000:1”.
When a probe other than 1 MΩ probe (for example a 50 Ω probe) is to be used, connect a
through-type 50 Ω terminator*2 for impedance matching.
*2 When placing an order for the 50 Ω terminator as the one supplied with the instrument, quote the
number “700976”.

Setting the probe attenuation

Follow the operating procedure given in Section 5.3 “Setting the Probe Attenuation” (page
5-4) so that the probe’s attenuation matches the one displayed below “Probe” in the soft key
menu which appears when the INPUT key is pressed. If they do not match, measured values
cannot be read correctly.

IM 701510-01E 3-7
 3.7 Compensating the Probe (Phase Correction)

CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the CAL terminal, as damage to the
instrument may result.

Operating Procedure
1. Turn ON the power switch.
2. Connect the probe to the input terminal to which the signal is to be applied.
3. Touch the probe’s tip against the CAL output terminal and connect the grounding wire
to the grounding function terminal.
4. Press the AUTO-SETUP key.
5. Press the “EXEC” soft key. The calibration signal is displayed on the screen.
6. Insert a screwdriver into the trimmer adjusting hole in the probe and turn the trimmer so
that the displayed waveform becomes square.
Phase adjusting hole

CAL signal output terminal

Grounding function terminal

Explanation
Reason for probe compensation
If the probe’s input capacitance is outside the specified range, the gain will not be constant
across different frequencies, preventing display of the correct waveforms. The input
capacitance varies depending on the probe used, so the variable capacitor (trimmer)
provided on the probe must be adjusted.
Probe compensation must be performed when the probe is to be used for the first time.
Moreover, the appropriate input capacitance varies according to which channel is used, so
probe compensation is required when the probe is switched from one channel to another.

Calibration signal
A CAL signal (square waveform) of the following characteristics is output from the CAL
terminal on the front panel.
Frequency : Approx. 1 kHz
Amplitude : Approx. 1 V

Waveform differences

Correct waveform Over-compensated Under-compensated

(gain is too high at high (gain is too low at high
frequency) frequency)

3-8 IM 701510-01E
 3.8 Setting the Date and Time

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
Rotary knob
SELECT key 2. Press the “Date/Time” soft key to display the DATE/TIME setting
menu.
ESC key
Soft keys
3
Turning the Date/Time ON/OFF

Before Starting Observation and Measurement of Waveforms

3. Turn the rotary knob to select “Mode”, and select “ON” or “OFF”
using the SELECT key.
Setting the Date/Time
4. Turn the rotary knob to select “Year”, “Month”, “Day”, “Hour”,
MISC key “Minute” or “Second”. Press the SELECT key to display the
setting screen.
5. Set the required value using the rotary knob.
6. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting screen.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all necessary items are set.
8. Turn the rotary knob to select “SET” and press the SELECT key to
confirm the settings.
9. Press the ESC key to close the menu.

Explanation
Setting the Date/Time ON or OFF
When you set the mode to ON, the date and time will appear in the upper right corner of the
screen. And when making a hard copy of the screen (to the built-in printer or external
plotter) the date and time will be printed together with the waveform.

The current date and time are saved together with the waveform data or set-up data when
the data is saved to a floppy disk.

Setting values of Date/Time

DATE TIME
Year : 1980 to 2079 Hour : 00 to 23
Month : 1 to 12 Minute : 00 to 59
Day : 1 to 31 Second : 00 to 59

Note
The date and time are backed up by the built-in lithium battery. Leap years are provided.

IM 701510-01E 3-9
 4.1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the START/STOP key to start/stop waveform acquisitioning.
2. In case the indicator located at the upper left of the START/STOP
key is lit, waveform acquisition is in progress.
3. In case the indicator located at the upper left of the START/STOP
key is not lit, waveform acquisition is not in progress. In the upper
left corner of the screen, “Stopped” appears.

Common Operations
START/STOP key

Explanation
Operation when averaging mode is selected as the acquisition mode
Averaging stops when acquisition is stopped, and resumes when acquisition is restarted.

Operation during display of accumulated waveforms

Accumulated display stops temporarily when acquisition is stopped. When measurement is
restarted, the accumulated display is reset and accumulation starts.

The START/STOP key is not operative in the following cases

• When remote state is active (i.e. the REMOTE indicator is lit);
• When a short or long copy is being output to the built-in printer;
• When the floppy disk is being accessed (e.g. when data is being saved to it). (If
acquisition is in progress, access to the floppy disk starts after acquisition is stopped.);
• When calibration, auto set-up or initialization is in progress.

Operation in combination with external clock

When the external clock is being used and you start acquisition, the error messages “Ext
clock too slow” or “Ext clock too fast” might appear.

Note
If the START/STOP key is pressed to start acquisition while acquisition data (ACQ data) loaded from a
floppy are being displayed, the acquisition data will disappear from the screen. It is possible to retain the
waveform on screen by stopping acquisition only for the channel corresponding to the trace No. of the
waveform. For a description of this operation, refer to page 12-6.
For details regarding the external clock settings, refer to page 5-8.

IM 701510-01E 4-1
 4.2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set-up
Function
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the AUTO-SETUP key to display the auto set-up execution
menu.
AUTO-SETUP key
Executing auto set-up
Soft keys 2. Press the “AUTOSET EXEC” soft key to perform auto set-up.
Channels will be turned ON/OFF automatically depending on whether
input is applied or not.
Canceling auto set-up
3. Press the “UNDO” soft key to restore the previous settings which
were in effect before the auto set-up. Note however that, if you have
performed any other settings, it might be necessary to press the
AUTO-SETUP key once again.

Explanation
Waveforms for which auto set-up is effective
Frequency : Approx. 40 Hz to 150 MHz
Amplitude : Approx. 50 mV or higher (when probe attenuation is 1:1)
Type : Repetitive (but not complex) waveform

Auto set-up settings related to the vertical axis

CH1 to 4 (CH1/CH2 for DL1520/DL1520L)
Depending on whether input is applied or not, the channels are automatically
turned ON or OFF. (In case of an amplitude of at least approx. 50 mV (and
probe attenuation is 1:1), the channel will be turned ON).
V/DIV when one waveform is displayed : Set to a value so that the peak voltage
is between 1.6 div p-p and 4 div p-p.
when two waveforms are displayed : Set to a value so that the peak voltage
is between 0.8 div p-p and 2 div p-p.
when three waveforms are displayed : Set to a value so that the peak voltage
is between 0.4 div p-p and 1 div p-p.
when four waveforms are displayed : Set to a value so that the peak voltage
is between 0.4 div p-p and 1 div p-p.
POSITION Set as follows depending on the number of channels which are ON.
Single channel Two channels Three channels Four channels

INPUT • Input coupling: DC; Offset: 0V

• Inversion: Unchanged
• Probe attenuation : Unchanged
Probe attenuation must be set before starting auto set-up.
• Acquisition hold : Unchanged

4-2 IM 701510-01E
 4.2 Displaying Waveforms using the Auto Set-up Function

Auto set-up settings related to the horizontal axis

TIME/DIV Set to a value so that between two and four periods of the slowest input
signal can be observed.
If this is not possible for any of the channel input signals, set to 1ms/
div.
TIMEBASE Set to “INT”.

Auto set-up settings related to triggers

MODE Set to “AUTO”.
TYPE Set to “EDGE”.
LEVEL/SOURCE The trigger level is set to half the amplitude of the trigger source, and
the channel for the slowest signal is selected as the trigger source. The
slope setting is set to “ ”.
4
COUPLING Set to “DC”, HF rejection remains unchanged.

Common Operations
POSITION Set to 0div.
DELAY Set to “0s”.
HOLD OFF Set to “OFF”.

Auto set-up settings related to acquisition/display conditions

START/STOP Acquisition is started.
ACQUISITION Set to “NORMAL”.
LENGTH (for DL1540L)
Unchanged.
FILTER Smoothing is set to “OFF”, Band to “FULL”.
ZOOM Mode is set to “OFF”, and other settings remain unchanged.
DISPLAY Settings related to interpolation, the X-Y display, and accumulate
display remain unchanged.
DISPLAY FORM Settings related to graticule, scale, %marker and Waveform
information remain unchanged.

Auto set-up settings related to waveform analysis

MEASURE Settings related to automated measurements remain unchanged.
CURSOR Settings related to cursor measurements remain unchanged.
MATH Waveform computation and phase shift are set to “OFF”.

Other Auto set-up related settings

STORE/RECALL Display of recalled waveforms is set to “OFF”.
SAVE/LOAD Display of loaded waveforms is set to “OFF”.

UNDO : Cancellation of auto set-up

After auto set-up has been completed, this function allows you to restore the settings which
were in effect before the auto set-up was performed.
However, if the power is turned OFF, the settings which were in effect before the auto set-
up will be lost. Thus, it is not possible to perform an UNDO before an auto set-up.

Note
• It is not possible to perform auto set-up while GO/NO-GO determination is in progress.
• The snapshot waveform will be deleted if auto set-up is performed.
• The auto set-up function may not operate correctly in certain cases such as when the waveform contains
DC components or high frequency components.

IM 701510-01E 4-3
 4.3 Initializing Settings

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the INITIALIZE key to display the initialization execution
menu.
INITIALIZE key
2. Press the “INITIAL EXEC” soft key to execute initialization.
Soft keys

Explanation
Default settings related to the vertical and horizontal axes
CH1 to CH4 All channels ON (CH1/CH2 for DL1520/DL1520L)
V/DIV 50 V/div
POSITION The horizontal position is set to 0div. For the vertical position, refer to
the figures (Two channels, Four channels) given under title
“POSITION” in section 4.2.
INPUT Input coupling: DC, Probe attenuation: 10:1, Inversion: OFF
TIME/DIV 1 ms/div
TIMEBASE INT

Default settings related to trigger

MODE AUTO
FUNCTION EDGE
LEVEL/SOURCE Trigger source: CH1, Trigger slope: “ ”,Trigger level: 0 V
COUPLING Trigger coupling: AC, HF rejection: OFF
POSITION Center of the waveform display frame
DELAY Delay time: 0 s
HOLD OFF Mode: OFF, Hold-off time: MIN (0.2µs)

Default settings related to other settings

ACQUISITION Mode: NORMAL
LENGTH (for DL1520L/DL1540L)
Record length: 10K
FILTER Smoothing: OFF, Band limit: FULL
DISPLAY Interpolation: SINE, X-Y display: OFF, Accumulate: OFF
DISPLAY FORM Graticule: GRID, Scale: ON, % Marker: OFF, Waveform information:
ON, Intensity: TEXT (9)
SHIFT OFF (LED is not lit)

Settings which cannot be initialized

In the following cases, the settings which were in effect before initialization will be retained
even if initialization is performed.
• Date and time • Displayed waveforms/setting parameters
• GO/NO-GO zone waveforms stored in the internal memory
• Communications addresses

Points to note when initializing

• Snapshot waveforms will be deleted when initialization is performed.
• Operations such as measurements, computations, etc. will be halted.
• Initialization cannot be performed during GO/NO-GO.

4-4 IM 701510-01E
 4.4 Halting a Waveform and Erasing the Halted
Waveform (Snap Shot and Clear Trace)
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the SNAP SHOT key to halt the waveform.
SNAP SHOT key 2. Press the CLEAR TRACE key to erase the halting waveform.
CLEAR TRACE key

Common Operations
Explanation
Snap Shot Function
A snapshot waveform is displayed each time the SNAP SHOT key is pressed and will be
deleted when you switch between MAIN/ZOOM or MainZoom display, or when
initialization of settings is performed.
A snapshot cannot be performed during X-Y waveform display.
In order to view snapshot waveforms only, you can either turn off the input signal (by
pressing the CH key), or move the vertical position of the displayed channel.
Snapshot waveforms will remain on the screen even if calibration is performed.
The following operations are not possible on snapshot waveforms.
• Position movement
• Cursor measurement
• Automated measurement
• Expansion
• Waveform computation
• Storage in the internal memory
• Outputting to an external plotter
• Saving on a floppy disk in case of the HP-GL and PS format

Functions of the CLEAR TRACE key

Deletes the following waveforms.
• Snapshot waveform
• Accumulated waveform (refer to page 7-12)
Restarts the following operations.
• Averaging (refer to page 7-1)
• Equivalent time sampling

IM 701510-01E 4-5
 4.5 Performing Calibration

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the CAL key to display the calibration execution menu.
Executing manual calibration
2. Press the “EXEC” soft key to execute calibration.
Soft keys Turning automatic calibration ON
3. Press the “Auto CAL” soft key to select “ON”.

CAL key

Explanation
About the calibration function
The following parameters are calibrated.
• Ground level offset
• A/D converter gain
• Trigger threshold level
• Time axis for equivalent time sampling
Calibration takes approximately five seconds. No keys are operative during calibration.

Automatic calibration function

When the automatic calibration function is ON, calibration is performed automatically after
the following time periods has elapsed in case T/div has been changed.
After the power is turned ON
3 minutes;
10 minutes;
30 minutes, then every half hour.

4-6 IM 701510-01E
 4.6 Setting Values
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob
SELECT key Entry using the keyboard
1. Press the SHIFT + MISC(KEYBOARD) key to display the
ESC key
keyboard.
Setting by rotary knob and SELECT key
2. Use the rotary knob to select the desired value and press the SELECT
key. This allows setting one by one.
3. Select the “SET” key and press the SELECT key. The keyboard
screen will be closed. 4

Common Operations
Keys Setting by corresponding panel keys (available on DL1540/
corresponding SHIFT key DL1540L)
to keyboard <, > key
(available with 2. After having performed step 1, press the corresponding panel keys
DL1540/DL1540L) directly.
MISC(KEYBOARD) key 3. After having entered the new value, select the “SET” key and press
the SELECT key. The keyboard screen will be closed.

Entry by rotary knob

1. Change the value (displayed in the lower right side of the screen) by
turning the rotary knob.
2. When the new value has been selected using the rotary knob, use the
<, > keys to move to the next position to be changed.
Ex.

Explanation
Entry using the keyboard
The operation described in step 1 will only result in displaying the corresponding keyboard
when the setting allows numerical input.
Depending on the setting, there are cases when units such as k, m, u (symbolizing µ), EXP
and NAN (Ignore) appear. To change such a setting, select the correct one using the rotary
knob, and press the SELECT key.
Pressing the RESET key will clear the keyboard display.
Decimal enterings will be rounded as necessary to comply with the step size.

Entry using the rotary knob

Pressing the RESET key will reset the value displayed in the rotary knob menu to the
default value (factory setting).

IM 701510-01E 4-7
 4.7 Entering Characters using the Keyboard

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Display the keyboard used for entering a file name or comment
SELECT key (displayed when your are prompted a character input).
ESC key
2. Use the rotary knob to select the desired character or symbol and press
the SELECT key. The entered character will appear on the displayed
keyboard.
3. Repeat step 2 until all characters and symbols are entered.
4. Move the rotary knob to the “ENT” setting and press the SELECT
key. The file name, comment and such will be set and the keyboard
screen will be closed.

<, > key

Explanation
Displaying the keyboard to enter characters/symbols
For entry of a file name, refer to
6.9 Setting the Action-On Trigger (page 6-14)
9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone (page 9-1)
9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters (page 9-5)
12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data (page 12-4)
13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data (page 13-4)
For entry of a comment, refer to
10.6 Entering a Comment (page 10-10)

Function keys on the soft keyboard

DEL ........ Deletes the character or symbol left of the cursor in the character string.
INS .......... Switches between insert and overwrite modes.
CAPS ..... Switches between upper and lower case letters.
CLR ........ Deletes all entered characters and symbols. Has thus the same function as the
RESET key on the front panel.
SPACE ... Enters one space.
ENT ........ Confirms the entered characters and symbols.
* Pressing the < or > key shifts the entry position (cursor) to the left or right.
ESC key Aborts entering file name or comments during setting. The keyboard screen will
be closed and setting will be ignored.

Points to note
• The following number of characters can be entered.
File name : 1 to 8
Comment : 0 to 25
• The following character types are available.
File name : Digits, letters (not case sensitive), _(underline), – (minus), %, (, )
Comment : All characters and symbols on the keyboard (case sensitive), and space
• The following five file names are not available due to MS-DOS restrictions.
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK

4-8 IM 701510-01E
 5.1 Turning Display of Input Signal Waveforms ON/
OFF
Keys and Procedure
1. The waveform will appear on the display after you have pressed the
CH key
CH key. The indicator above the CH key will light up.
2. If you want to display all waveforms, press all the CH keys, and
verify that all the indicators light up.
3. In order to turn the display of a waveform off, press the corresponding
CH key once more.

Explanation
Maximum display record length and limits on waveform acquisition (when 1
MW for 1520L or 2 MW for DL1540L is selected)
The channels which acquire/display the waveform are limited to channel 1 on DL1520L and 5
channel 1 and 2 on DL1540L. Channel 2 on DL1520L and channel 3 and 4 on DL1540L do

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

not acquire/display the waveform.
When the time axis setting is set to 50 ns to 5 ns range; when the trigger mode is not single
mode; or when one of the two, channel 2 or trace math in the case of DL1520L and one of
the two, channel 3 or 4 in the case of DL1540L is ON, maximum display record length of 1
MW for DL1520L and 2 MW for DL1540L can not be selected.
For information about selection of maximum displayable record length, refer to Section 7.1
(page 7-1).
CH key operation during waveform math
The math waveform will be displayed at trace 3 (for DL1540/DL1540L, location where the
input signal of channel 3 is usually displayed). For DL1540/DL1540L, even if you press the
CH3 key, and the indicator is lit, the math waveform will be displayed. For DL1520/
DL1520L, the math waveform will be displayed at trace MATH.
The math waveform consists of data of channel 1 and channel 2. Even when you turn off the
display of channel 1 or 2, the math waveform will remain.
For DL1540/DL1540L, to display the input signal waveform of channel 3, you have to turn
OFF waveform math. Refer to page 8-16.
CH key operation during display of a recalled waveform
When you recall waveform data from the internal memory, that waveform will appear on the
screen.
To turn the display of the recalled waveform off, press the CH key corresponding to the
number of the recalled waveform (displayed as “MEM”), and select OFF at the appeared
menu. Refer to page 11-2, step 13 and 14.
CH key operation during display of a loaded waveform
When you load P-P waveform data or acquisition waveform data from a floppy disk, that
waveform will appear on the screen.
To turn the display of the P-P waveform off, press the CH key corresponding to the number
of the P-P waveform (displayed as “MEM”), and select OFF at the appeared menu. Refer to
page 12-5, step 19 and 20.
To turn the display of the acquisition waveform off, press the CH key corresponding to the
number of the acquisition waveform.
CH key operation during display of a GO/NO-GO zone waveform
Pressing a CH key turns display of both the corresponding input signal waveform and the
zone waveform ON/OFF.
Note
• If the START/STOP key is pressed to start acquisition while loaded waveforms are displayed, the
displayed waveforms will be cleared from the screen. It is possible to retain a desired waveform on
screen by stopping acquisition of the corresponding channel. For a description of this operation, refer
to page 12-6.
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, if you have saved ACQ data to multiple floppy disks, you can opt to load all
of this data or only part of it (for example, data from one disk only). If you do a partial load, the
waveform display will not appear over the entire time axis, but only over a portion of it. Refer to the
procedures for saving and loading of ACQ waveform data, beginning on page 12-5.
• Pressing the SNAP SHOT key also keeps the waveform on the screen. To clear the snapshot waveform,
press the CLEAR TRACE key.
• In the following cases erroneous waveforms might appear on channel 3 or 4 (channel 2 for DL1520).
Acquiring the waveform once again will result in a correct display.
• For DL1540, when the record length is 120KW, the trigger mode is SGL (L) and waveform
acquisitioning has ended and you turn CH3 or CH4 ON, while they had been OFF until then.
• After acquiring waveforms at 200 MS/s and you stop acquisition, and then you switch CH3 or CH4
(CH2 for DL1520/DL1520L) ON.

IM 701510-01E 5-1
 5.2 Setting the Input Coupling

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the INPUT key corresponding to the channel for which input
coupling is to be selected. The input setting menu will be displayed.
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired coupling type.
Soft keys 3. When DC is selected, turn the rotary knob to set the desired offset
voltage.

INPUT key

Explanation
Input coupling
The following three types of input coupling are available. The default is “DC”.
AC Displays only the AC content of the input signal.
DC Displays both the DC and AC content of the input signal. Only in this case an offset
value can be set. This setting can also be done pressing the KEYBOARD key (refer
to page 4-7).
GND Used to check the ground level.

Input coupling and frequency characteristic

The frequency characteristic when “AC” or “DC” is selected is shown below.
Note that low-frequency signals and low-frequency contents are not acquired if “AC” is
selected.

When "AC" is selected When "DC" is selected

Attenuation Attenuation

0 dB 0 dB
– 3 dB – 3 dB

150 MHz 150 MHz

less than 10 Hz when using 1:1 probe
less than 1 Hz when using 10:1 probe
Input frequency Input frequency

Offset voltage and vertical sensitivity

If “DC” is selected, it is possible to cancel the offset voltage for the input signal.
The allowable setting range varies depending on the vertical sensitivity as shown in the
table below.

Vertical sensitivity* Allowable setting range* Setting step

10 mV to 500 mV/div –10 V to ±10 V 500 µV
(for DL1520/DL1520L, 20 mV to 500 mV/div)
1 V to 5 V/div –100 V to ±100 V 5 mV
10 V to 50 V/div –1000 V to ±1000 V 50 mV
* The above values are given for a probe attenuation of 10:1. They will be 1/10 the value shown
when the attenuation is 1:1, 10 times the value shown when it is 100:1, and 100 times the value
shown when it is 1000:1.

5-2 IM 701510-01E
 5.2 Setting the Input Coupling

Offset voltage and displayed value (measured value)

The offset function eliminates unnecessary DC voltage from an input signal voltage. If the
offset voltage is set to a positive value, the input signal is displayed with the offset voltage
subtracted from it, as shown below. The offset voltage is also subtracted from the measured
voltages obtained during automated measurements.
offset : aV

Decreases by "a" V.

Points to note when setting the offset voltage 5

• Once the offset voltage has been set, it will not change unless initialization is performed.

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

For instance, if the input coupling is set to “AC” after the offset voltage has been set, the
offset voltage will remain unchanged even if the input coupling is later switched to “DC”.
• When the probe attenuation is changed, the offset voltage also changes accordingly.
• The offset voltage remains unchanged irrespective of the vertical sensitivity. However, if
the offset voltage exceeds the allowable setting range, it will be set to the maximum or
minimum vertical sensitivity value.
• When the offset voltage is set, it will also be subtracted from the acquired waveform data
in acquisition memory. Thus, care must be taken when saving acquisition data.

CAUTION When using AC coupling with a 10 MΩ, 10:1 probe, keep in mind that the
voltage at the input connector will not be attenuated to 1/10 at the probe tip
for input signal components below 1 Hz. Be careful not to let the input voltage
at the probe tip exceed 250 V (DC+ACpeak) or 177 Vrms for signal
components below 1 Hz.

IM 701510-01E 5-3
 5.3 Setting the Probe Attenuation

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the INPUT key corresponding to the channel for which the
probe attenuation is to be selected. The input setting menu will be
displayed.
Soft keys 2. Press the “Probe” soft key to display the probe selection menu.
3. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation.

INPUT key

Explanation
Probe attenuation
Probe attenuation can be selected from “1:1”, “10:1”, “100:1” and “1000:1”. The default is
“10:1”.
Set to “10:1” when using the probe supplied with the instrument.
Set to “1:1” when using a BNC cable.

Note
The selected probe attenuation will remain unchanged even if auto set-up is performed.
When the probe attenuation is changed, the offset voltage also changes accordingly.

5-4 IM 701510-01E
 5.4 Inverting a Waveform

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the INPUT key corresponding to the channel whose waveform
is to be inverted. The input setting menu will be displayed.
2. Press the “Invert” soft key to select “ON”.
Soft keys

INPUT key
5
Explanation

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

Relevant channels
The input signals for channels CH1 to CH4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, CH1/CH2) can be
inverted independently of one another. Each time the soft key is pressed, “ON” or “OFF”
are displayed alternately, and the waveform will be inverted accordingly.

Indication of an inverted signal

When a waveform is inverted, the corresponding trace number is highlighted as shown
below.

Points to note
• Cursor measurement, automated measurement, waveform math and GO/NO-GO
determination are performed on the inverted waveforms, not on the original ones.
• The waveform data that will be saved in the acquisition memory will not be inverted, so
care must be taken when saving the acquisition data.

IM 701510-01E 5-5
 5.5 Setting the Vertical Sensitivity

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob
1. Press the V/DIV key of the desired channel to display the vertical
sensitivity setting menu. Verify that the “CAL” setting is highlighted.
2. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired sensitivity (V/div).
soft keys

3. In case you want to adjust the setting in smaller steps, press the
“Variable” soft key.
4. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired sensitivity.

V/DIV key

Explanation
Setting the range and probe attenuation
The V/div setting range varies depending on the attenuation of the probe used, as shown
below.

Probe attenuation Setting range*

1:1 1 mV to 5 V/div (for DL1520/DL1520L, 2 mV to 5 V/div)
10:1 10 mV to 50 V/div (for DL1520/DL1520L, 20 mV to 50 V/div)
100:1 100 mV to 500 V/div (for DL1520/DL1520L, 200 mV to 500 V/div)
1000:1 1 V to 5000 V/div (for DL1520/DL1520L, 2 V to 5000 V/div)
* V/div can be set in multiples of 1, 2 and 5, e.g. 1 V/div → 2 V/div → 5 V/div.

Variable mode
When “Variable” is highlighted, V/div can be set in fine steps as shown below.

CAL Setting value Variable Setting range* Setting step*

10 mV 5.0 mV to 20.0 mV 0.1 mV
(Available on DL1540/DL1540L)
20 mV 10.0 mV to 50.0 mV 0.1 mV
50 mV 20.0 mV to 100.0 mV 0.1 mV
100 mV 50 mV to 200 mV 1 mV
200 mV 100 mV to 500 mV 1 mV
500 mV 200 mV to 1000 mV 1 mV
1V 0.5 V to 2.00 V 0.01 V
2V 1.00 V to 5.00 V 0.01 V
5V 2.00 V to 10.00 V 0.01 V
10 V 5.0 V to 20.0 V 0.1 V
20 V 10.0 V to 50.0 V 0.1 V
50 V 20.0 V to 100.0 V 0.1 V
* The above values are given for a probe attenuation of 10:1. They will be 1/10 of the value shown
when the attenuation is 1:1, 10 times the value shown when it is 100:1, and 100 times the value
shown when it is 1000:1.

Note
If the RESET key is pressed to reset V/div setting, V/div will be set to the maximum possible level.
For a description of how to set the probe attenuation, refer to page 5-4.

5-6 IM 701510-01E
 5.6 Changing the Waveform’s Vertical Position

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob
1. Press the POSITION key of the channel whose waveform you want
to move.
2. Select the position of the screen where you want the waveform to be
Soft keys displayed by pressing the corresponding soft key.
3. Turn the rotary knob to fine adjust the position.

POSITION key
5
Explanation

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

Moving range
The ground level can be moved up to ±4.000 div from the center of the waveform display
frame. This range can be travelled using the rotary knob. The soft keys allow you to move
the waveform quickly to either of the positions “–3div/–1div/0div/+1div/+3div”.

Setting resolution
The ground level can be moved in steps of 0.02 divisions irrespective of the vertical
sensitivity.

Waveforms which cannot be moved

Snapshot waveforms

Indication of the vertical position

For an input signal waveform or computed waveform, the corresponding trace No. and
ground level mark are displayed on the left edge of the waveform display frame. The trace
No. and ground level mark also move with the waveform when the waveform is moved.
For a recalled or loaded waveform, the trace No. (preceded by “L”) also moves with the
waveform when the waveform is moved.

Ground level
mark
Trace No.

Note
Waveforms can still be moved vertically if acquisition is in progress. However, if some parts of the
waveform exceed 10.24 divisions before acquisition is stopped, those parts will remain at the end of the
display frame even if the waveform is moved.
If a waveform is moved vertically out of the waveform display frame, measured values obtained during
automated measurement or cursor measurement may not be accurate.

IM 701510-01E 5-7
 5.7 Selecting the Timebase

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
2. Press the “Time Base...” soft key to display the timebase setting
menu.
Soft keys

3. Select the required timebase by pressing the corresponding soft key.

“EXT CH4” menu is available on DL1540/DL1540L.

4. In case you selected “EXT IN” or “EXT CH4”, use the rotary knob to
MISC key set the required threshold level. “EXT CH4” menu is available on
DL1540/DL1540L.

Explanation
Selectable Timebases
Timebase can be selected from the following three types.
INT Internal clock signal
EXT IN Clock signal input to the EXT TRIG IN/EXT CLOCK IN terminal
EXT CH4 Clock signal input to the CH4 input terminal
(Available on DL1540/DL1540L)

When “EXT IN” is selected

Input a clock signal to the EXT TRIG IN/EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel (for
DL1520/DL1520L, EXT TRIG terminal on the front panel). The clock signal must conform
to the specifications given below.
• For DL1520/DL1520L
Item Specifications
Connector type BNC
Maximum input voltage 250 V(DC+ACpeak) or 177 Vrms, when the
frequency is 1 kHz or below, (CAT I and II)
Input band DC to 100 MHz
Fequency range of external 40 Hz to 80 MHz
clock
Input range 2 ranges (±10 V and ±1 V)
Input level range ±10 V range: –10 V to + 10 V in steps of 40 mV
(Probe attenuation ratio 1:1) ±1 V range: –1 V to + 1 V in steps of 4 mV
Input sensitivity 2 Vp-p (±10V range)
(Probe attenuation ratio 1:1) 200 mVp-p (±1V range)
Input coupling AC/DC
HF rejection Bandwidth limit (approx. DC to 15 kHz)
for the input signal can be turned ON/OFF.
Input impedance Approx. 1 MΩ (same as section 16.1)

• For DL1540/DL1540L
Item Specifications
Connector type BNC Input terminal
Maximum input voltage ±6 V Example
Frequency range 40 Hz to 15 MHz (DL1540/DL1540L)
EXT CLOCK IN
Input level TTL/CMOS level recommended EXT TRIG IN !
0.3 Vp-p or greater when measured ±6V MAX 1MΩ
at the end of the connector
±0.15 V or greater relative to the
threshold level
Input impedance Approx. 1 MΩ
Threshold level 1.5 V or 0.15 V
Minimum pulse width 25 ns or more for both
High and Low levels

5-8 IM 701510-01E
 5.7 Selecting the Timebase

If a clock signal exceeding the maximum input voltage is input to the each
CAUTION terminal, damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result.

When “EXT CH4” is selected (available on DL1540/DL1540L)

Input a clock signal to the CH4 input terminal on the front panel. The clock signal must
conform to the specifications given below.

Item Specifications
Frequency range 40 Hz to 80 MHz
Input level 2 div p-p or higher
Input impedance 1 MΩ
Minimum pulse width 5 ns or more for both High and Low levels

Threshold level setting range for detection of edge : Voltage equivalent to ±5 div
5
Points to note when sampling using an external clock

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

• The clock signal must be continuous. No burst signal is allowed.
• If the frequency of the clock signal is out of specification, a warning message “External
Clock too slow” or “External Clock too fast” will be displayed at the top of the screen.
When the internal clock is switched to the external clock, no waveforms will be displayed
until the clock conforms to the specifications.
• Only real-time sampling mode is available.
• Envelope mode cannot be set.
• Display of waveforms is not possible in roll mode.
• No function to divide the clock signal is available.
• Since the time axis setting cannot be changed, expand the time axis if you want to change
the display range. For a description of expanding waveforms, refer to page 7-4.
• Trigger delay setting is invalidated.
• The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement function is
expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal. No unit is displayed.

IM 701510-01E 5-9
 5.8 Setting the Time Axis

Keys and Procedure

Turn the time axis setting knob to adjust the time axis setting. The
time axis setting value, displayed in the lower right corner of the
screen, will change accordingly.

Time axis setting knob

Explanation
Time axis setting range
T/div can be set within the range of 5 ns/div to 50 s/div (in multiples of 1, 2 and 5)

The relationship between sampling mode and display mode

Sampling mode and display mode change as follows according to the T/div setting. For a
detailed description of sampling mode and display mode, refer to page 1-5 and 1-6.

• If maximum displayable record length is set to 1 K (DL1520L/DL1540L)

Time-axis setting Sampling mode Display mode *1
50 s to 50 ms/div Real-time Roll mode
20 ms to 1 µ s/div Real-time Update mode
500 ns to 100 ns/div Real-time/repetitive *2 Update mode
50 ns to 5 ns/div Repetitive Update mode

• If maximum displayable record length is set to 10 K or 100 K (DL1520L/DL1540L), or

when DL1520/DL1540 is used
Time-axis setting Sampling mode Display mode *1
50 s to 50 ms/div Real-time Roll mode
20 ms to 10 µ s/div Real-time Update mode
5 µ s to 100 ns/div Real-time/repetitive *2 Update mode
50 ns to 5 ns/div Repetitive Update mode

• If maximum displayable record length is set to 400 K (available only if trigger mode is
“single”) (DL1520L/DL1540L)
Time-axis setting Sampling mode Display mode *1
50 s to 200 ms/div Real-time Roll mode
100 ms to 100 ns/div Real-time Update mode

• If maximum displayable record length is set to 1 M (available only if trigger mode is

“single” and the only displayed channel is CH1 for DL1520L.) (DL1520L/DL1540L)
Time-axis setting Sampling mode Display mode *1
50 s to 500 ms/div Real-time Roll mode
200 ms to 100 ns/div Real-time Update mode

• If maximum displayable record length is set to 2 M (available if trigger mode is “single”

and display channel is 1 or 2) (DL1540L)
Time-axis setting Sampling mode Display mode *1
50 s to 1 s/div Real-time Roll mode
500 ms to 100 ns/div Real-time Update mode
*1 Indicates the display mode which is in effect when the trigger mode is auto mode or auto level
mode and hysterisis is set off. For a description of how to set the trigger mode, refer to 6.8
“Setting the Trigger Mode” (page 6-12).
*2 Either real-time or repetitive mode is possible. For a description of how to switch modes, refer
to 7.1 “Selecting Acquisition Mode, Sampling Mode and Record Length” (page 7-1).

5-10 IM 701510-01E
 5.8 Setting the Time Axis

Relationship between sampling rate and record length

Reducing the time-per-division setting (“T/div” time axis setting) increases the sampling
rate. If T/div is set below some specific level, the displayed record length will be shorter
than the maximum displayable record length. For details, refer to Appendix 2/Appendix 3.

Changing T/div while acquisition is in progress

T/div can still be changed when acquisition has been stopped with the START/STOP key.
The newly set T/div will come into effect when acquisition is restarted. When T/div is
changed while acquisition is in progress, the new T/div value will be displayed below the T/
div for the displayed waveform, as shown below.

T/div for the currently displayed waveform

T/div just after acquisition has started

Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes

Points to note
• T/div can be changed irrespective of the displayed menu, since a T/div setting knob is
available. But, for DL1520L/DL1540L, note that it is not possible to select a short time
axis (50ns/div or less) if maximum displayable record length has been set to 400 KW, 1
MW, or 2 MW (for DL1540L only). (See page 7-1.)
• The T/div setting has no effect if the external clock signal is selected as the timebase.
• During expansion mode, the T/div obtained by dividing the normal display T/div by the
expansion ratio is displayed.
• If T/div is set so that roll mode is activated, averaging will not be performed on the
waveform data, even if the acquisition mode has been set to averaging mode (“NORM”
will be displayed instead of “AVG”).
• Even if the trigger mode is single mode, if T/div is set to a value within a certain range,
roll mode will still be activated. However, when a trigger is activated and acquisition of
data of the specified record length ends, waveform display will be stopped.
• Pressing the CLEAR TRACE key while waveforms are displayed in repetitive sampling
mode will restart sampling.

IM 701510-01E 5-11
 5.9 Changing the Waveform’s Horizontal Position

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the POSITION key to display the menu for horizontal
positioning.
2. Select the position to where you want to move the viewing frame by
Soft keys pressing the corresponding soft key.
3. Turn the rotary knob to fine adjust the position.

POSITION key

Explanation
Moving range
The viewing frame can be moved up to ±5.00 div from the center of the waveform display
frame. This range can be travelled using the rotary knob. The soft keys allow you to move
the viewing frame quickly to either of the positions “–4div/0div/+4div”.

Setting resolution
The frame can be moved in steps of 0.02 divisions irrespective of the horizontal sensitivity.

Waveforms which cannot be moved

The viewing frame cannot be moved when snapshot waveforms are displayed.

Indication of the horizontal position

The trigger position marker will show the new position. In roll mode, a bargraph will appear
in the upper side of the screen and will show which part of the waveform is shown on the
screen.
Other modes than roll mode Roll mode
When the display is in roll mode and data acquisition has
been started, the horizontal position will automatically
be moved to +5 div.
Horizontal position is 0 div Horizontal position is +5 div +5 div

displayed range

Horizontal position is moved to +4 div Horizontal position is moved to 0 div 0 div

displayed range

Horizontal position is moved to –4 div Horizontal position is moved to –4 div –4 div

displayed range

Points to note
• The horizontal position cannot be changed while acquisition is in progress in the roll
mode. In order to move the horizontal position, first stop the acquisition.
• In all modes except the roll mode, changing the horizontal position might result in cases
where the displayed range exceeds the record length of the acquisition memory. No
waveform will be shown at that part of the displayed range.
• Even when the horizontal position has been changed, the zoom box will not change its
position on the display. Refer to page 7-4.

5-12 IM 701510-01E
 6.1 Relationship between Trigger Type and Trigger
Source/Slope/Level
Settings which can be made with the LEVEL/SOURCE soft key or rotary knob menu vary
as shown below according to the selected trigger type. The setting procedure for each trigger
type is described on the page indicated below. (The menu provided with DL1540/DL1540L
is used. For DL1520/DL1520L, CH3/CH4, OR, PATTERN and WIDTH menus are not
provided. For DL1520/DL1520L, TV trigger menu differs from the one given below.)

LEVEL/ Sets the trigger source/slope

TYPE Selects the trigger type
(state)/level
SOURCE
page 6-2 Selection of trigger source/slope

Trigger level

page 6-4

6
Center level

Activating a Trigger
Selects trigger condition

Width

page 6-5

Selection of broadcasting type Polarity selection

Selection of field No./Line No. Trigger level

page 6-7 Selection of trigger source/slope/state

Trigger level

page 6-8 When activating a trigger by state pattern only

Selection of trigger source/state Select "X"

Trigger level
Selection of trigger condition

When activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal

Selection of the trigger slope of Selection of clock channel
the clock channel

Trigger level of clock channel

Selection of trigger source/state

Trigger level
Selection of trigger condition

page 6-10

Selection of trigger source/state

Selection of trigger conditions

Pulse width Trigger level

IM 701510-01E 6-1
 6.2 Setting the Edge Trigger

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu.
2. Press the “EDGE” soft key.
(For DL1520/DL1520L, “OR”, “PATTERN” and “WIDTH” menus
Soft keys are not displayed. They are optional with DL1540/DL1540L.)

Selecting the trigger source and slope and setting the trigger level
3. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the trigger source
selection menu.
4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger source. The
TYPE key trigger slope selection menu appears. When “LINE” is selected, this
LEVEL/SOURCE key menu will not be displayed and thus steps 5 to 11 are not necessary.
5. Keep pressing the soft key corresponding to the selected trigger source
until the desired slope is selected.

6. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level.

When “EXT” is selected as the trigger source for DL1520/DL1520L

7. Press the “Range” soft key to display the external trigger range
setting menu.

8. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired range.

9. Press the “Probe” soft key to display the probe selection menu.
10. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation ratio.

11. Turn the rotary knob to select the desired trigger level for the external
trigger.
Explanation
Types of Trigger sources and setting the trigger slope/level
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Select one of these to select one of the input signals CH1 to CH4 as the trigger source.
The trigger slope can be selected from the following three slope types.
Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger
level to one above the trigger level.
Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from the level above the trigger
level to the one below the trigger level.
Activates a trigger in either of the above cases.
The setting range for the trigger level is within ±10 div of the vertical sensitivity, but is
however limited by the waveform display frame. For example, when the voltage sensitivity
is set to 50 mV/div, the trigger level to +300 mV and the ground level of the trigger source
is positioned at 0div, the trigger level becomes +250 mV. In case the ground level of the
trigger source is positioned at –3 div, the trigger level becomes +300 mV. The setting step
for the trigger level is 1/50 of the vertical sensitivity.

6-2 IM 701510-01E
 6.2 Setting the Edge Trigger

EXT (external Trigger)

Select this when connecting the trigger signal source to the “EXT TRIG IN/EXT CLOCK
IN” terminal on the rear panel (also used as the terminal for an external clock) and selecting
the signal as the trigger source.
For DL1520/DL1520L, connect the trigger signal source to the “EXT TRIG” terminal on
the front panel.
For the specifications of the terminal, refer to “When “EXT IN” is selected” in section 5.7

CAUTION If a clock signal exceeding the above permissible maximum input voltage is
input to the each terminal, damage to the internal circuits of the instrument
may result.

The trigger slope must be selected from “ ”, “ ” and “ ” in the same way when one
of the channels CH1 to CH4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, CH1/CH2) is selected. For DL1540/
DL1540L, the trigger level must be either “0.15 V” or “1.5 V”.

• Setting the EXT range (for DL1520/DL1520L)

Select either ±1 V or ±10 V range. The default is ±10 V range. 6
• Setting the attenuation for EXT probe (for DL1520/DL1520L)

Activating a Trigger
Select 1:1, 10:1, 100:1 or 1000:1. The default is 10:1.
• Setting the EXT trigger level (for DL1520/DL1520L)
The EXT trigger level can be set within the following range. This range is effective if the
probe’s attenuation is set to 1:1. If the probe’s attenuation is set to10:1, 100:1 or 1000:1,
the range will be multiplied by10, 100 and 1000 respectively.
• EXT range is ±1 V: –1 V to +1 V in steps of 4 mV
• EXT range is ±10 V: –10 V to +10 V in steps of 40 mV
* For DL1540/DL1540L, refer to “EXT (external Trigger)” on this page.

LINE (Line trigger)

Select this when the signal to be displayed is synchronized with the frequency of the
commercial power source (50 Hz /60 Hz) and you want to select the commercial power
source voltage signal as the trigger source signal.

Points to note when setting the edge trigger

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the edge trigger setting will be invalidated.
However, selecting the edge trigger will restore the previous edge trigger setting.
• If the trigger mode is not auto-level mode, the trigger level will not change once it has
been set. Thus, changing the amplitude of the trigger signal or changing the offset may
invalidate the trigger level, thereby hindering activation of a trigger. Conversely, if the
trigger mode is auto-level mode, the median of the amplitude of the trigger signal is
detected and the trigger level is set to the median value automatically if the trigger level
is invalidated. For a detailed description, refer to 6.8 “Setting the Trigger Mode” (page 6-
12).

Note
If the trigger slope is set to “up/down ”, no trigger can be activated either at “rise ” or “fall ”.
In this case, try to set an appropriate hold-off time. This may cause a trigger to be activated. For a
description of how to set the hold-off time, refer to page 6-19.

IM 701510-01E 6-3
 6.3 Setting the Window Trigger

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu.
2. Press the “WINDOW” soft key.
(For DL1520/DL1520L, “OR”, “PATTERN” and “WIDTH” menus
Soft keys are not displayed. They are optional with DL1540/DL1540L.)

Selecting the trigger condition and setting the window

3. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the trigger condition
selection menu.
4. Press either soft key “IN” or “OUT”.
TYPE key
LEVEL/SOURCE key

5. Press the “CENTER” soft key and set the center level of the window
using the rotary knob.

6. Press the “WIDTH” soft key and set the width of the window using the
rotary knob.

Explanation
Selecting the trigger condition and setting the window
The window trigger will only be applied to the input signal of channel 1.
Trigger conditions can be selected from the following types.
IN Trigger will be activated when the trigger source level enters a preset voltage range.
OUT Trigger will be activated when the trigger source level exits from a preset voltage
range.
The center level of the window and the corresponding width can be set. The setting limit
and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger. Refer to page 6-2. The
smallest width of the window is the CAL setting of the vertical sensitivity.
[IN] [OUT] Trigger is activated
Trigger is activated

WIDTH Window WIDTH Window

CENTER CENTER
Trigger is activated

Points to note when setting the window trigger

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the window trigger setting will be invalidated.
However, selecting the window trigger again will restore the previous settings.
• Auto-mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto-level mode.

6-4 IM 701510-01E
 6.4 Setting the TV Trigger

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Connect the video signal to the CH1 terminal.
2. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu.
3. Press the “TV” soft key.
Soft keys (For DL1520/DL1520L, “OR”, “PATTERN” and “WIDTH” menus
are not displayed. They are optional with DL1540/DL1540L.)

Selecting the broadcasting system for the video signal

If OR, PATTERN and WIDTH menus are not provided, the select menu will
TYPE key be displayed next to the trigger type selection menu.
LEVEL/SOURCE key 4. Press any of the “NTSC”, “PAL” or “HDTV” soft key to select the
desired broadcasting system. (HDTV menu is not provided with
DL1520/DL1520L.)
6

Activating a Trigger
Selecting the field and line number
If OR, PATTERN and WIDTH menus are not provided, the select menu will
be displayed next to the trigger type selection menu.
5. Press the “Field” soft key to select the desired field number.
6. Turn the rotary knob to select the desired line number.

Selecting the polarity and setting the trigger level

7. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the polarity/trigger level
setting menu.
8. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired polarity.
9. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level.

Explanation
Broadcasting systems with which the TV trigger can be used
NTSC, PAL, HDTV
(HDTV menu is not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.)

Selecting the field No. : Field

1 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse and the line start at the same
time.
2 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse starts 1/2H (H: horizontal scan
time) after the line starts.
X Detects both of the above types of field.

IM 701510-01E 6-5
6.4 Setting the TV Trigger

Selecting the line No. : Line

A trigger is activated at the beginning of the selected line.
• NTSC : 5 to 1054
Field 1 starts at line No. “5”. (Field 2 starts at line No. “268”.)
Line Nos. in ( ) cannot be set.

Field 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Line No. 524 525 526 548
1049 1050 1051 1052

Field 2
Line No. 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285
786 810

• PAL : 2 to 1251
Field 1 starts at line No. “2”. Field 2 starts at line No. “315”.
Line Nos. in ( ) cannot be set.
Field 1
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 7
Line No. 621 622 623 624 625 626 632
1246 1250 1251

Field 2
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
Line No. 933 945

• HDTV : 2 to 2251 (available on DL1540/DL1540L)

Field 1 starts at line No. “2”. Field 2 starts at line No. “565”.
Line Nos. in ( ) cannot be set.
45H 517H
5H 5H 35H
2245 2250 2251
Line No. 1120 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1166
(1) 2 3 4 5 6 7 41
Field 1
1682 1687 1688 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1728
Line No. 557 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 603
Field 2
5H 5H 34H
1/2H 1/2H
45H 518H

Selecting the polarity: Polarity

POSITIVE NEGATIVE
Trigger point
Trigger level
NTSC /PAL
Trigger level
Trigger point
Synchronization pulse
Trigger point Trigger level
HDTV

Trigger level
Trigger point

Setting the trigger level : Level

Set the difference between the beginning of the synchronization pulse and the level at which
the trigger level is judged.
The setting range is from 0.10 div to 2.00 div. The setting resolution is 0.05 div.
The default settings are given below.
NTSC/PAL 0.50 div
HDTV (available on DL1540/DL1540L) 1.00 div

Points to note when activating a TV trigger

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the TV trigger setting will be invalidated. However,
selecting the TV trigger again will restore the previous settings.
• Only channel 1 can be used for the video signal. Other channels cannot be used.
• For a TV trigger, the trigger coupling, HF rejection and trigger hysteresis settings are
ignored.

6-6 IM 701510-01E
 6.5 Setting the OR Trigger (Optional for DL1540/
DL1540L)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu.
2. Press the “OR” soft key.

Soft keys
Selecting the trigger source, trigger slope and state and setting
the trigger level
3. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the trigger source
selection menu.
4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired signal source, and press
the corresponding soft key to select the desired trigger slope/state
TYPE key selection.
LEVEL/SOURCE key
5. In case you selected “ ” or “ ”, use the rotary knob to set the
desired trigger level.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the trigger slope, state and level for each
trigger source.
6

Activating a Trigger
Explanation
Types of trigger sources and setting the trigger slope, state and level
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects which of the input signals CH1 to CH4 will be used as the trigger source.
Select the trigger slope/state from the following.
Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from a level below the trigger level
to one above the trigger level.
Activates a trigger when the trigger source changes from the level above the trigger
level to the one below the trigger level.
X This channel will be skipped as a trigger source.
The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger. Refer
to page 6-2.

Points to note when setting the OR trigger

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the OR trigger setting will be invalidated. However,
selecting the OR trigger again will restore the previous settings.
• Auto-mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set auto-level mode.

IM 701510-01E 6-7
 6.6 Setting the Pattern Trigger (Optional for
DL1540/DL1540L)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu and
press the “PATTERN” soft key.

Soft keys
2. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the trigger source/state
selection menu.
3. Press the “ClkCH” soft key to display the clock channel selection
menu. The default value is “X”.

TYPE key
LEVEL/SOURCE key

Activating a trigger by state pattern only

4. Press the “X” soft key.
5. Press the trigger source soft key and select the state. Do this for all
trigger sources. In case “H” or “L” has been selected, use the rotary
knob to set the trigger level as well. Skip to step 7.

Activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal

4. Continuing from step 3, select the desired clock channel and press the
corresponding soft key.
5. Select the trigger slope of the clock channel using the soft keys, and
then use the rotary knob to set the trigger level.

6. Press the trigger source soft key for the channels which are not clock
channel, and select the trigger state. In case “H” or “L” has been
selected, use the rotary knob to set the trigger level as well.

7. Press the “Condtn” soft key and select the desired conditions using
the corresponding soft keys.
• menu in case of activating a trigger by state pattern only

• menu in case of activating a trigger in synchronization with the

clock signal

6-8 IM 701510-01E
 6.6 Setting the Pattern Trigger (Optional for DL1540/DL1540L)

Explanation
Setting the trigger source and trigger state/level
The trigger state can be selected from the following.
L The trigger source level is above the preset trigger level.
H The trigger source level is below the preset trigger level.
X Not used as the trigger source.
The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger. Refer
to page 6-2.

Selecting the clock channel (ClkCH)

Set the clock channel to “X” when no trigger in synchronization with the signal is activated,
and select from “CH1 - CH4” when a trigger in synchronization with the signal is activated.
The following trigger slopes can be selected.
Slope rising edge (changes from a level below the trigger level to one above the trigger
level)
Slope falling edge (changes from a level above the trigger level to one below the trigger
level)

Selecting the trigger condition: Condtn 6

• Activating a trigger using only the state pattern

Activating a Trigger
Select the trigger condition from the following.
ENTER Activates a trigger when the combination (pattern) becomes true.
EXIT Activates a trigger when the pattern becomes false.

[Setting example]
CH1 input
CH1 : H
CH2 input
CH2 : L Pattern Pattern
CH3 : X becomes false. becomes true.

CH4 : X Trigger conditions are met

Condition : ENTER

• Activating a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal

Select the trigger condition from the following.
TRUE Activates a trigger on the slope edge (riseor fall) of the clock channel when the
state pattern becomes true.
FALSE Activates a trigger on the slope edge of the clock channel when the state
pattern becomes false.

CH1 input
[Setting example]
CH1 : H CH2 input

CH2 : L
CH3 input
CH4 : X Pattern
Pattern Pattern
Clock CH : CH3 becomes false Pattern
becomes becomes
becomes true
false true
Condition : TRUE
Trigger conditions are met

Points to note when setting the pattern trigger

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the pattern trigger setting will be invalidated.
However, selecting the pattern trigger again will restore the previous settings.
• Auto-mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto-level mode.
• Select the trigger states for all trigger sources. Make sure to select the trigger slope for
the selected clock channel.
• If you want to activate a trigger in synchronization with the clock signal, make sure that
the pattern set-up time is 2 ns or more relative to the clock and that the hold-time is 0 ns
or less.

IM 701510-01E 6-9
 6.7 Setting the Width Trigger (Optional for DL1540/
DL1540L)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob
Selecting the width trigger
1. Press the TYPE key to display the trigger type selection menu.
Soft keys
2. Press the “Width” soft key to display the width condition menu.

3. Select the width condition by pressing any of the “PULSE<T”,

“PULSE>T” or “TIMEOUT” soft keys.

TYPE key
LEVEL/SOURCE key

4. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired pulse time.

Selecting the trigger source/state and setting the trigger level

5. Press the LEVEL/SOURCE key to display the trigger source
selection menu.
6. Press the soft key corresponding to the channel to be used as a trigger
source and set the trigger state.

7. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired trigger level.

Explanation
Selecting the width condition
PULSE<T Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source becomes
narrower than the preset pulse width.
PULSE>T Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source is wider
than the preset pulse width and the state changes.
TIMEOUT Trigger will be activated when the pulse width of the trigger source becomes
wider than the preset pulse width.

[PULSE<T] [PULSE>T] Trigger point Trigger point

Trigger point (TIMEOUT) (PULSE>T)
[TIMEOUT]

W W
W W W

6-10 IM 701510-01E
 6.7 Setting the Width Trigger (Optional for DL1540/DL1540L)

Width setting range and setting steps

Width setting range and setting steps are given below. The setting accuracy of the width is
within ± (2 ns + set value x 0.01), approximately.

Setting range Setting steps

5 ns to 9.99 µs *1, 2 10 ns
10 µs to 99.9 µs 100 ns
1 ms to 9.999 ms 1 µs
10 ms to 99.99 ms 10 µs
100 ms to 999.9 ms 100 µs
1 s to 9.999 s 1 ms
*1 The next pulse width after 5 ns is 10 ns.
*2 When the width condition is set to PULSE<T, the smallest setting range is 5 ns; when the
width condition is set to PULSE>T or TIMEOUT, the smallest setting range is 30 ns.

Selecting the trigger source/state and setting the trigger level

The trigger source should be selected from CH1 to CH4
Select the trigger state from the following.
H The trigger source level is above the preset trigger level.
L The trigger source level is below the preset trigger level. 6
The setting limit and resolution for the trigger level is the same as for the edge trigger. Refer

Activating a Trigger
to page 6-2.

Points to note when setting the width trigger

• A malfunction may occur if pulse intervals are less than 20 ns or more.

20 ns or more

• If the trigger type setting is changed, the width trigger setting will be invalidated.
However, selecting the width trigger again will restore the previous settings.
• Auto-mode operations are carried out even if the trigger mode is set to auto-level mode.

IM 701510-01E 6-11
 6.8 Setting the Trigger Mode

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the MODE key to display the trigger mode selection menu.
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger mode.
• Menu (DL1520)
Soft keys

• Menu (DL1540)

• Menu (DL1520L/DL1540L)

MODE key

Explanation
Selecting the trigger mode
The following six trigger modes are available. The default is “AUTO”.

AUTO (Auto-mode)
Updates the displayed waveform each time a trigger is activated if the trigger condition has
become true within the time-out period of approximately 100 ms. Updates the displayed
waveform automatically if the trigger condition becomes false within the time-out period.
The roll mode will be activated irrespective of the trigger condition if T/div is set to a value
greater than 50 ms. However, the roll mode will not be displayed when the history memory
function is “ON”.

AT-LVL (Auto-level mode)

Updates the displayed waveform in the same way as auto-mode if the trigger condition has
become true within the time-out period. If the trigger condition becomes false, the trigger
level is automatically set to the median of the amplitude of the trigger source, and then the
waveform is displayed.
Auto-level mode is only valid, however, if the edge trigger has been selected as the trigger
type. Auto-mode operations are carried out even if auto-level mode has been selected for a
trigger other than an edge trigger. Furthermore, roll mode will be activated irrespective of
the trigger type if T/div is set to a value greater than 50 ms. However, the roll mode will not
be displayed when the history memory function is “ON”.

NORMAL (normal transmission mode)

Updates the displayed waveform only when the trigger condition becomes true. The
displayed waveform will not be updated if the trigger condition does not become true.
In this mode, it is not possible to judge whether the signal is input or the trigger level is
correct unless a trigger is activated. Furthermore, the ground level is not displayed even if
the input coupling is set to “GND”.
Furthermore, in this mode, roll mode display is never activated, whatever the T/div setting,
and waveforms are displayed only when a trigger is activated.

SGL(S) (Single short mode) : for DL1540, SINGLE (Single mode) : for DL1520,
DL1520L and DL1540L
When the START/STOP key is pressed and the trigger condition becomes true, the
waveform is updated once only and acquisition stops.
If the time-axis setting corresponds to roll mode, the oscilloscope generates a roll-mode
display. When the trigger occurs, the oscilloscope obtains data for the set record length and
then stops the displayed waveform.
For details about record length, refer to Appendix 2/Appendix 3.

6-12 IM 701510-01E
 6.8 Setting the Trigger Mode

SGL(L) (Single long mode) : for DL1540

This mode is the same as the aboved mentioned SGL(S) mode, except that the record length
here is longer. The maximum record length is 120 K words.
For more details about the relation between time axis setting, sample rate and record length,
refer to Appendix 2.

N-SGL (Single (N) mode) : for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L

Each time the trigger condition becomes true after the START/STOP key has been pressed,
acquisition is performed the specified number of times. The waveforms will be displayed
after acquisition stops.
If the START/STOP key is pressed again before acquisition has been completed the
specified number of times, acquisition stops immediately. In this case, all the waveform data
which has been acquired thus far is valid and can be displayed.
This trigger mode can only be used in real time sampling mode.
For setting the number of repetitions, refer to page 7-7.

Points to note when setting the trigger mode

• If single short mode or single mode is selected with a T/div setting which enables
repetitive time sampling mode, acquisition will stop after it has been repeated the 6
specified number times.

Activating a Trigger
• If trigger mode is changed while acquisition is stopped (i.e. while the START indicator is
not lit), acquisition starts automatically.
• For DL1520L/DL1540/1540L if acquisition is interrupted in single (N) mode, only the
waveforms which have been acquired completely are displayed.
• For DL1520L/DL1540/1540L if the history memory function is set ON or if the
acquisition mode is set to averaging, all single mode triggering cannot be done.
• For DL1520L/DL1540/1540L if single long mode or single (N) mode is selected,
repetitive sampling cannot be done.
• When the record length (maximum displayable record length) is 400 K/1 MW for
DL1520L, or 400 K/1 MW/2 MW for DL1540L, single mode is the only mode available.

IM 701510-01E 6-13
 6.9 Setting the Action-On Trigger

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the SHIFT + MODE (ACTION) key to display the trigger on
action selection menu.
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired action. Data acquisition
Soft keys will stop.
3. In case you selected “FD(P-P)” or “FD(ACQ)”, pressing the
“FileName” soft key will display the keyboard. In case you selected
“PRINTER”, skip step 4.

4. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details on entering

MODE(ACTION) key characters using the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
START/STOP key Starting the action on trigger
SHIFT key
5. Press the “EXEC” soft key to restart acquisition. The selected action
will be validated when a trigger is activated.

or

Stopping the action on trigger

6. Press the “ABORT” soft key to stop acquisition.

or

Explanation
Selecting the action-on trigger
The action can be selected from the following.
PRINTER Outputs hardcopy to the built-in printer.
FD(P-P) Saves all the displayed waveforms (as P-P compressed data) on a floppy disk
when a trigger is activated.
FD(ACQ) Saves all the displayed acquisition data (binary data) on a floppy disk when a
trigger is activated.
When the action on trigger starts, the trigger mode will change automatically to the single
short mode or single mode.

Specifying a file name when “FD(P-P)” or “FD(ACQ)” has been selected as the
trigger action
A file No. (starting from “0001”) is assigned to each waveform data automatically when the
data is saved on a floppy disk. It is possible to insert a common file name (character string
consisting of up to four characters) before the assigned file No. (for instance,
“TRGO0001”).
The entered file name is reset when “ABORT” is selected.

6-14 IM 701510-01E
 6.9 Setting the Action-On Trigger

Points to note when using the action on trigger

• When you change the trigger mode to any other than the single short mode or single
mode, the trigger on action will be aborted.
• It is not possible to perform auto set-up or GO/NO-GO determination while the action on
trigger is in progress.
• When the action on trigger starts, the trigger mode will change automatically to the single
short mode or single mode. Even after canceling the action on trigger, the previous
trigger mode will not be restored.
• When the action on trigger is restarted (“EXEC”) after first being aborted (“ABORT”),
the automatically assigned file No. will start from 0001. Previous saved data will
therefore be overwritten.
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, note that under “FD(ACQ)” action, ACQ-data record length
may in some cases be too long to be saved onto a single floppy disk. In this case the
screen will display an error message after saving data to the initial floppy disk.

Activating a Trigger

IM 701510-01E 6-15
 6.10 Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the COUPLING key to display the trigger coupling selection
menu.
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trigger coupling.
Soft keys 3. In case you want to set HF rejection, press the “ON” soft key at the
“HF-Rej” field.

COUPLING key

Explanation
Selecting the Trigger coupling
The following types are available.
AC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source after the DC content has been
removed. The trigger level becomes 0 V.
DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any processing. The
trigger level becomes the center of the amplitude of the trigger source.
The default value is “AC”.
The trigger coupling setting applies to all channels simultaneously.

Turning HF rejection ON/OFF

Set to “ON” if you want to use the trigger source signal as the trigger source after the high
frequency content (frequency contents exceeding approximately 15 kHz) has been removed.

Points to note when setting the trigger coupling and HF rejection

These settings will be ignored if “EXT” or “LINE” is selected as the trigger source or “TV”
is selected as the trigger type. However, the setting made for EXT will be valid (for
DL1520/DL1520L).

6-16 IM 701510-01E
 6.11 Changing the Trigger Position

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the POSITION/DELAY key to display the trigger position/
delay setting menu.
2. Press the soft key to set the desired trigger position. Depending on the
Soft keys model or the software (ROM) version, the trigger position can also be
set using the rotary knob.
• Menu (DL1520/DL1520L/DL1540 with software (ROM)
version 1.20 or later/DL1540L with software (ROM) version
1.20 or later)

POSITION/DELAY key

• Menu (DL1540 with software (ROM) version before 1.20/

DL1540L with software (ROM) version before 1.20)
6

Activating a Trigger
Explanation
Selecting the trigger position
• The trigger position can be selected from the following. As shown in the menu above,
the selection varies depending on the model or the software (ROM) version.
+4div +4 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame
+2div +2 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame
0div the center of the waveform display frame
–2div –2 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame
–4div –4 divisions from the center of the waveform display frame
–4div –2div 0div +2div +4div

• Depending on the model or the software (ROM) version, the trigger position can be set with in
steps of 1/50 div using the rotary knob.

Setting the trigger delay and trigger position

The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory
will actually be displayed on the screen. The trigger point refers to the point at which a
trigger is activated. If no delay time has been set (i.e. delay time: 0 s), the trigger position
and the trigger point refer to the same location.
However, if a delay time is set using the trigger delay, the trigger position must be moved
using the above operations, since the delay point will not match the trigger point.
For more details on delays, refer to the next page.
Move the trigger position to the right
T (Trigger position) T (Trigger position)
Delay time Delay time

Trigger point Trigger point

Points to note when setting the trigger position

• If the trigger position is changed while acquisition is not in progress (i.e. while the
START indicator is not lit), the setting will not be valid until acquisition starts and the
waveforms are updated.
• The time measured by cursor measurement will change if the trigger position is changed,
because the trigger position is used as the reference position (except when the roll mode
is being displayed).
IM 701510-01E 6-17
 6.12 Setting the Trigger Delay

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the POSITION/DELAY key to display the delay time setting
Rotary knob
menu.
2. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired delay time. You can also use the
< or > keys.
• Menu (DL1520/DL1520L/DL1540 with software (ROM)
version 1.20 or later/DL1540L with software (ROM) version
1.20 or later)

POSITION/DELAY key • Menu (DL1540 with software (ROM) version before 1.20/
DL1540L with software (ROM) version before 1.20)

Explanation
Setting the delay time
The trigger delay time is the duration between the point at which a trigger is activated, and
the point at which data acquisition starts.
T(Trigger position)
Delay time

Trigger point

The setting range is 0 to 9.999 s. The setting step is as follows.

Setting time Setting step
0 to 999.9 ns 0.1 ns
1 µs to 9.999 µs 1 ns
10 µs to 99.99 µs 10 ns
100 µs to 999.9 µs 100 ns
1 ms to 9.999 ms 1 µs
10 ms to 99.99 ms 10 µs
100 ms to 999.9 ms 100 µs
1 s to 9.999 s 1 ms

Points to note when setting the delay time

A delay time cannot be set if the external clock has been selected as the timebase. The
setting will be invalid if sampling is performed using the external clock.

6-18 IM 701510-01E
 6.13 Setting the Hold-off Time

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the HOLD OFF key to display the hold-off time setting menu.
2. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired hold-off time. You can also use
the < or > keys. Turning the rotary knob switches the “Mode” ON
Soft keys automatically.

3. To deactivate the hold-off function, press the “Mode” soft key and
select “OFF”.

HOLD OFF key

<, > keys

Explanation
Hold-off time setting
6
The hold-off time setting range is 0.2 µs to 9.999 s.

Activating a Trigger
The hold-off time will be 0.2 µs (minimum) if initialization is performed or if hold-off mode
has been turned “OFF”.

Turning the hold-off function ON/OFF

The hold-off time which has been set will be retained even if the hold-off function is set to
OFF. If the hold-off function is switched ON again, the hold-off time which was in effect
before the hold-off function was switched OFF will be restored.

Points to note when setting the hold-off time

• If the hold-off time has been set to 100 ms or more, do not switch the trigger mode to
auto-mode or auto-level mode. No trigger can be activated properly, as this conflicts with
the time-out period (100 ms).
• The waveform updating interval may get longer depending on the hold-off time. In this
case, switch the hold-off function OFF or change the hold-off time.

IM 701510-01E 6-19
 7.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode, Sampling Mode,
and Record Length for DL1520L/DL1540L
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the ACQ key to display the acquisition mode/sampling mode
setting menu. “Length” menu is provided with DL1520L/DL1540L.
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired acquisition mode.
Soft keys

When averaging mode is selected

3. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired averaging count (attenuation
constant).

ACQ key
Selecting sampling mode
2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “Rep” soft key and select
“ON” for real-time sampling mode or “OFF” for repetitive sampling
mode.

Selecting the record length (maximum displayable record length), 7

(for DL1520L/DL1540L)

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “Length” soft key. The
screen returns the length selection menu. For DL1520L, “2M” menu
is not displayed
3. Press the soft key corresponding to the maximum displayable record
length that you want to use.

Explanation
Selecting acquisition mode
Acquisition mode can be selected from the following modes. The default setting is
“NORMAL”.
• NORMAL (normal mode)
Sampled data is stored in the acquisition memory without specific data processing.
• ENVELOPE (Envelope mode)
The data is sampled at 100 MS/s. Each time data is stored in the acquisition memory, the
maximum and minimum values are extracted. These are then stored in the acquisition
memory and used to display the envelope waveform.
• AVERAGE (Averaging mode)
The averaging count can be set to values between “1” and “256” in steps of 2 n.

1
An = {(N - 1)An - 1 + Xn}
N
An : Value obtained after nth averaging
Xn : nth measured value
N : Attenuation constant

IM 701510-01E 7-1
7.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode, Sampling Mode, and Record Length for DL1520L/DL1540L

Selecting sampling mode: Repetitive

A sampling mode can be selected provided that the selected T/div setting allows sampling
both in real-time and repetitive modes.
However, the repetitive sampling mode is not effective when the trigger mode is set to
single long mode. Furhermore, the repetitive sampling mode cannot be set in case of the
single (N) trigger mode, when the history memory function is used, or in case FFT is used.
T/div settings which enable the selection of the sampling mode are from 5 µs to 100 ns/div.

Selecting the (maximum displayable) record length, for DL1520L/DL1540L

You can set the maximum displayable record length to 1 KW, 10 KW, 100 KW, 400 KW, 1
MW, or 2 MW (for DL1540L only). The default selection is 10 KW. The following
restrictions apply.
• Time-axis settings from 50 ns to 5 ns cannot be used in combination with 400 KW, 1
MW, and 2 MW record lengths. If the time-axis value is already set within this range, the
400 KW, 1 MW, and 2 MW selections will not be available.
• If the selected record length is 400 KW or 2 MW, certain time-axis settings will produce
waveform display over eight divisions only, with no waveform appearing over the two
rightmost time-axis divisions.
• Selection of 400 KW, 1 MW, and 2 MW record lengths is available only if trigger mode
is “single.”
• For DL1540L, it is not possible to switch on Channel 3 or Channel 4 while record length
is set to 2 MW. It is not possible to select 2 MW as the record length while Channel 3 or
Channel 4 is on.
• For DL1520L, it is not possible to switch on Channel 2 or trace MATH while record
length is set to 1 MW. It is not possible to select 1 MW as the record length while
Channel 2 or trace MATH is on.
• Refer to Appendix 3 for information about the relationship between time axes, sampling
rates, and record lengths.

Points to note when making acquisition mode and sampling mode settings
• Normal mode operations are carried out, even if envelope mode has been selected.
• It is not possible to select envelope mode if waveforms are sampled by the external clock.
• If each single mode has been selected as the trigger mode or if the history memory
function has been set to ON, averaging mode cannot be selected.
• If auto-mode or auto-level mode has been selected as the trigger mode and T/div has been
set such that the display is in roll mode, averaging will not be performed, even if
averaging mode is selected. In this case, waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
• It is not possible to select envelope mode if input smoothing or FFT has been set to ON.

7-2 IM 701510-01E
 7.2 Setting the Input Filter

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the FILTER key to display the input filter setting menu.
Applying the bandwidth limit
2. Press the “20 MHz” soft key to apply the bandwidth limit. To cancel
Soft keys the bandwidth limit, select “FULL”.
Applying the smoothing function
2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “Smoothing” soft key and
select “ON”. To stop smoothing, select “OFF”.

FILTER key

Explanation
Bandwidth limit
The bandwidth frequency limit can be “20MHz”. The frequency characteristic when the
bandwidth limit is applied is shown below. When “FULL” is selected, the frequency
bandwidth is 150 MHz.
7

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

-3 dB

20 MHz FULL(150 MHz)

Smoothing process
A moving average value is obtained for each five points of sampling data and the data
obtained is used when displaying the waveform. This process is performed on the data in the
acquisition memory, so it can still continue even if acquisition is stopped.
The following frequency characteristic of the smoothing process is dependent on the sample
rate. The attenuation rate will be –3 dB when the frequency is approximately 13% of the
sample rate. When the acquisition mode is envelope mode, this process cannot be carried
out.

0 dB
-3 dB
Attenuation

f : Sample frequency

0.13f 0.5f f
Frequency

IM 701510-01E 7-3
 7.3 Zooming the Waveform

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the ZOOM key to display the zoom setting menu.
Displaying the pre-zoom and expanded waveform
2. Press the “MainZoom” soft key of the “ZOOM Mode” setting. The
Soft keys expansion rate and position selection menu appears.

Setting the expansion rate and position

3. After having pressed the “ZOOM” soft key of the “ZOOM Knob”
setting, use the rotary knob to adjust the expansion rate.

ZOOM key

4. After having pressed the “POS” soft key of the “ZOOM Knob”
setting, use the rotary knob to adjust the position.

Displaying the expanded waveform only

2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “ZOOM” soft key of the
“ZOOM Mode” setting. The expansion rate and position are as
described in step 3 and 4.

Displaying the pre-zoom waveform only

2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “MAIN” soft key of the
“ZOOM Mode” setting. The expansion rate and position are as
described in step 3 and 4.

Explanation
Expansion Rate
• Expansion rate limits
The expansion rate which can be set varies according to the specified record length of the
pre-zoom waveform. The specified record length depends on the model, time axis setting,
sampling mode and trigger mode. For more details, refer to Appendix 2/Appendix 3.
The following table shows the maximum expansion rates for some record lengths.
Displayed record length 2M(8div) 2M 1M 800K(8div) 500K 400K(8div)
Maximum expansion rate 25000 20000 10000 10000 5000 5000
Setting position step (div) 0.00002 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 0.00002 0.00002

Displayed record length 400K 200K 160K(8div) 100K 50K 40K

Maximum expansion rate 4000 2000 2000 1000 500 400
Setting position step (div) 0.00005 0.00005 0.00005 0.0001 0.0002 0.0005

Displayed record length 20K 10K 5K 4K 2K 1K

Maximum expansion rate 200 100 50 40 20 10
Setting position step (div) 0.0005 0.001 0.002 0.005 0.005 0.01

Displayed record length 500 400 200 100

Maximum expansion rate 5 4 2 1
Setting position step (div) 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.1

7-4 IM 701510-01E
 7.3 Zooming the Waveform

• Expansion rate steps

Depending on the T/div value, the expansion rate steps are as follows.
In case of 50 s, 5 s, 500 ms, 50 ms, 5 ms, 500 µs, 50 µs and 5 µs/div
x1, x2.5, x5, x10, x25, x50, x100, x250, x500, x1000, x2500, x5000, x10000, x25000
In case of 20 s, 2 s, 200 ms, 20 ms, 2 ms, 200 µs and 20 µs/div
x1, x2, x4, x10, x20, x40, x100, x200, x400, x1000, x2000, x4000, x10000, x20000
In case of 10 s, 1 s, 100 ms, 10 ms, 1 ms, 100 µs and 10 µs/div
x1, x2, x5, x10, x20, x50, x100, x200, x500, x1000, x2000, x5000, x10000, x20000

• Zooming range position

The center of the zooming position box can be set within ±5 div of the waveform display
frame. The setting step depends on the displayed record length.

Selecting the display type when displaying an expanded waveform

The type of display can be selected from the following.
OFF Only the original display will be displayed;
MAIN The pre-zoom waveform together with the zoom box will be displayed;
ZOOM Only the expanded waveform will be displayed. The part of the pre-zoom
waveform selected in the zoom box will be expanded.
MainZoom Both the original and the expanded waveform will be displayed on the screen,
which is divided in two.
7
Selecting the display type when displaying an X-Y waveform
The type of display depends on the settings in the expansion menu. For X-Y mode, refer to

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

page 7-13.
ZOOM mode X-Y Mode
OFF X-Y T-Y & X-Y
OFF V-T pre-zoom X-Y pre-zoom V-T pre-zoom waveform (upper)
waveform waveform X-Y pre-zoom waveform (lower)
MAIN V-T pre-zoom X-Y pre-zoom V-T pre-zoom waveform
waveform waveform + zoom box (upper)
+ zoom box X-Y pre-zoom waveform (lower)
ZOOM V-T expanded X-Y expanded V-T expanded waveform (upper)
waveform waveform X-Y expanded waveform (lower)
MainZoom V-T pre-zoom X-Y expanded V-T pre-zoom waveform
waveform waveform + zoom box (upper)
+ zoom box (upper) X-Y expanded waveform (lower)
V-T expanded waveform (lower)

Selecting the display type in case of FFT mode (power spectrum)

The type of display depends on the settings in the expansion menu. For more details on the
power spectrum, refer to page 8-18.
ZOOM mode FFT Mode
FFT OFF FFT VT & FFT
OFF V-T pre-zoom FFT pre-zoom V-T pre-zoom waveform (upper)
waveform waveform FFT pre-zoom waveform (lower)
MAIN V-T pre-zoom FFT pre-zoom V-T pre-zoom waveform
waveform waveform + zoom box (upper)
+ zoom box FFT pre-zoom waveform (lower)
ZOOM V-T expanded FFT expanded V-T expanded waveform (upper)
waveform waveform FFT expanded waveform (lower)
MainZoom V-T pre-zoom FFT expanded V-T pre-zoom waveform
waveform waveform + zoom box (upper)
+ zoom box (upper) FFT expanded waveform (lower)
V-T expanded waveform (lower)

IM 701510-01E 7-5
7.3 Zooming the Waveform

Points to note when displaying an expanded waveform

• The waveform zone cannot be edited during GO/NO-GO if both pre-zoom waveform and
its expanded waveform are displayed at the same time.
• If you press the ZOOM Mode soft key while accumulated waveform display is in
progress, accumulated waveform display will be reset.
• If you press the ZOOM Mode soft key while a snapshot waveform display is being
displayed, the snapshot waveform will disappear.

7-6 IM 701510-01E
 7.4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential
Store Function (for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob Acquiring the waveform data only a specified number of times
1. Press the MODE key to display the trigger mode setting menu.
CLEAR TRACE key 2. Press the “N-SGL” soft key. When a trigger is activated at the time the
Soft keys “N-SGL” soft key is pressed, waveform acquisition starts.
For DL1520L/DL1540L, “SINGLE” menu will be displayed instead of
“SGL(S)” and “SGL(L)” menus.

3. Turn the rotary knob to set the number of acquisitions at

MODE key “Acquisition Count (N)”. When waveform acquisition is already in
START/STOP key progress and you change the number of acquisitions, make sure to
restart to get the specified number of acquisitions.

4. If no trigger has been activated already, press the START/STOP key

or once more the “N-SGL” soft key to start data acquisition. 7
Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting its number

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

5. Press the CLEAR TRACE key to clear the displayed waveforms.
6. Press the DISPLAY key to display the display selection menu.
7. Use the rotary knob to set the number of the data you want to see. The
corresponding waveform will appear at the same time.

Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting its time of

acquisition
8. Continuing from step 6, press the “Time Stamp” soft key to display
the list of acquired data with their acquisition times.

9. Use the rotary knob to highlight the data you want to see.

10. Press the SELECT key. The list will disappear and the selected
waveform will appear on the screen.

IM 701510-01E 7-7
7.4 Acquiring Waveforms using the Sequential Store Function (for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)

Displaying all waveforms

11. Continuing from step 6, 7 or 10, press the “ALL disp EXEC” soft
key to display all waveforms.

Explanation
Number of acquisitions: Acquisition Count (N)
• For DL1540, this setting specifies the number of times that data acquisitions will be
stored in memory, and ranges from 1 to 100. 100 is default setting.
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, the record length per iteration (for a given channel) and the
number of allowable iterations are determined by the selected maximum displayable
record length (see page 7-2), as indicated below. Under default settings the record length
is 10 KW, and 100 iterations are stored.
Maximum Displayable Supported Iteration Record Length per
Record Length Settings Waveform Iteration (per channel)
DL1520L DL1540L
1 KW 1 to 100 1 to 100 Same as “displayed record length” in
App. 3 (page App-5)
10 KW 1 to 50 1 to 100 Same as “displayed record length” in
App. 3 (page App-6)
100 KW 1 to 5 1 to 10 Same as “displayed record length” in
App. 3 (page App-7)
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, 400 KW or above: Function is not supported.
• The number of acquired data can be viewed in the upper side of the screen, where the
indication such as “Count=9” appears.

Displaying acquired data: Display Trace

The way of displaying the acquired data can be selected from the following.
• Displaying the selected waveform only
Selecting the waveform can be done by setting the Display Number or by highlighting
data from the Time Stamp list.
• Displaying all waveforms
When all waveforms are displayed, you can easily spot the waveform which is selected
by the Display Number since it is displayed more brightly.

Selecting the waveform to be displayed: Display Number

The setting ranges from 0 to –(the acquisition count number –1). The maximum value is 0.
The latest data being 0, previous data are labeled –1, –2, –3, etc..

Points to note when using the sequential store function

• For more details on trigger modes, refer to page 6-12.
• After the data is acquired the specified number of times, all the waveforms will appear on
the screen at once.
• Data will not be acquired in case of the repetitive sampling mode.
• If data acquisition is aborted while in progress, only the waveforms which have been
acquired so far will appear on the display. Only the acquired waveforms can be selected
at the Display Number setting.
• The all single modes will be deacivated when the history memory function is turned ON.
• Trigger mode cannot be set to “single (N) mode” if the selected record length is 400 KW,
1 MW, or 2 MW (for DL1540L only).

7-8 IM 701510-01E
 7.5 Using the History Memory Function (for
DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the HISTORY (for DL1520L, SHIFT + ACQ(HISTORY))
key to display the history memory ON/OFF setting menu.
CLEAR TRACE key 2. Press the “History” soft key and select “ON”. To select “OFF”, press
Soft keys the “History” soft key again.

Displaying a waveform from the memory

3. Stop data acquisition by pressing the START/STOP key.

HISTORY key Displaying a specific data by selecting its number

(Not provided with
DL1520/DL1520L) 4. Use the rotary knob to set the number of the data you want to see
ACQ(HISTORY) key (display number). The corresponding waveform will appear on the
SHIFT key
screen.

Displaying a specific acquired data by selecting its time of 7

acquisition

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

5. Continuing from step 3, press the “Time Stamp” soft key to display
the list of acquired data with their acquisition times.

6. Use the rotary knob to highlight the data you want to see.

7. Press the SELECT key. The list will disappear and the selected
waveform will appear on the screen.

Displaying all waveforms

8. Continuing from step 3, 4 or 7, press the “ALL Disp EXEC” soft key.

IM 701510-01E 7-9
7.5 Using the History Memory Function (for DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)

Explanation
Number of waveforms in the history memory
• Acquisition memory retains waveforms for the last N triggers, where N is equivalent to
the maximum number of iterations that can be stored under sequential-store
operation.The record length per waveform (on a given channel) is the same as that for
sequential-store mode. For details, refer to page 7-8.
• Once the history has become full (the number of triggers has exceeded N), each new
waveform acquisition deletes the oldest waveform in the history.

Displaying acquired data

Refer to page 7-8.

Selecting the waveform to be displayed: Display Number

The setting ranges from 0 to 99. The latest data being 0, previous data are being labeled –1,
–2, –3, etc..

Acquisition period
You can extend the acquisition period by setting the hold-off time, which temporarily halts
the trigger detection. This feature makes it possible to obtain a history of a periodically
occurring waveform.

Points to note when using the history memory function

• Data will not be acquired in case of the repetitive sampling mode.
• If data acquisition is aborted while in progress, only the waveforms which have been
acquired so far will appear on the display. Only the acquired waveforms can be selected
at the Display Number setting.
• The history memory function cannot be turned ON when the acquisition mode is set to
average, or when the trigger mode is set to SINGLE, SGL(S), SGL(L), or N-SGL.
• When the history memory function is set to ON, the display cannot be in the roll mode.
• The previously acquired waveforms will not appear on the screen while acquisition is in
progress.
• Waveforms will be acquired in the memory even if the display of the input signals has
been turned OFF. To display the acquired waveforms however, the display of the input
signals should be set to ON. Refer to page 5-1.
• When the conditions of waveform acquisition are changed, the history memory function
will be reset and previous waveform data will be lost.
• The history-memory function cannot be switched on if the selected record length is 400
KW, 1 MW, or 2 MW (for DL1540L only).

7-10 IM 701510-01E
 7.6 Changing the Interpolation Settings

Keys and Procedure

Royary knob 1. Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu.
2. Press the “Intrpl” soft key to display the interpolation selection menu.

Soft keys
3. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired interpolation type.

DISPLAY key

Explanation
Selecting the interpolation type: Intrpl
The following four interpolation types are available. The default is “SINE”.
OFF No interpolation; Displays the sampling data as a horizontal line.
LINE Interpolates between two dots with a straight line.
SINE Generates interpolation data using a sine function and interpolates between two 7
dots using a sine curve.

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

PULSE Draws a horizontal line to a point directly above or below the next data point and
then interpolates using two dots so that the end of the horizontal line is connected
to the next data point by a vertical line.

Note
LINE, SINE and PULSE can only be selected if the number of display points per division is 50 or less.
OFF can always be selected.

IM 701510-01E 7-11
 7.7 Displaying an Accumulated Waveform

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu.
2. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired accumulation time. Turning the
rotary knob automatically sets the “Accumu” setting to “ON”.
Soft keys

3. To cancel the accumulation function, select “OFF”.

DISPLAY key

Explanation
Setting the accumulation time
The accumulation time can be selected from the following. The default settings is “100ms”.
100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 2s,
3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s, INFINITE

Intensity of the accumulated waveform

The most recent waveform is bright and old waveforms (accumulated waveforms) are dark.

Clearing the accumulated waveform

Pressing the CLEAR TRACE key clears all accumulated waveforms except the most recent
one.

Points to note
• The following operations apply only to the latest waveform’s data if they are performed
using accumulated waveform display.
- Cursor measurements and automated measurements
- Saving the waveform data
• If you want to stop accumulation, press the START/STOP key to stop measurement.
Pressing the START/STOP key again to restart measurement will clear the previously
displayed waveforms and the accumulation time will be reset.
• Waveforms which can be accumulated are Pre-zoom waveforms, expanded waveforms
and X-Y waveforms. However, if both V-T waveform and X-Y waveform are displayed at
the same time, the V-T waveform cannot be accumulated.
• When the display type (ZOOM Mode setting) is changed during expansion display of an
X-Y waveform, the currently accumulated waveforms will be cleared and accumulation
will start again.

7-12 IM 701510-01E
 7.8 Displaying an X-Y Waveform

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the DISPLAY key to display the setting menu.
2. Press the “X-Y” soft key to display the X-Y selection menu.

Soft keys
When displaying both the X-Y waveform and the T-Y waveform
3. Press the “T-Y & X-Y” soft key.
When displaying the X-Y waveform only
3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “X-Y” soft key.
When displaying the T-Y waveform only
3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “OFF” soft key.
DISPLAY key

Explanation
Assigning channels to the X axis (horizontal axis) and Y axis (vertical axis)
The assignment has been pre-determined as follows. The CH1 input voltage is assigned to
the X axis and the CH2 input voltage to the Y axis. 7
An X-Y waveform can also be displayed for acquisition data loaded from a floppy disk. In

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

this case, the trace No. will simply be replaced by the channel No.

Selecting the display type

The display type can be selected from the following three types.
OFF Displays only the V-T waveform.
X-Y Displays only the X-Y waveform. In case the zoom setting has been set to
ZOOM, the display will show the expanded waveform as specified in the
zoom box.
T-Y & X-Y Displays both the V-T waveform and the X-Y waveform. The display depends
on the zoom settings. Refer to X.X for more details.

Points to note when displaying an X-Y waveform

• When displaying X-Y waveforms, only measurement of “Integ1XY” and “Integ2XY” is
possible during automated measurement. For a description of measurement operations
and the measured parameters, refer to 8.3.
• If both the V-T and X-Y waveforms are displayed, the V-T waveform will not be
accumulated. If the display mode is switched, accumulated waveform display will be
reset.
• When you want to display a sequentially stored waveform or one stored in history
memory as an X-Y waveform, you turn the rotary knob to select a [display number].
However, all the selected waveforms will appear on the screen. In order to display one
selected waveform only, press the CLEAR TRACE key after selection.

IM 701510-01E 7-13
 7.9 Changing the Graticule, Scale and % Marker
Settings
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the SHIFT + DISPLAY (DISPLAY FORM) key to display the
display condition setting menu.
Changing the graticule type
Soft keys 2. Select by pressing the “FRAME” or the “GRID” soft key.
Turning the scale ON/OFF
2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “Scale” soft key and select
“ON” or “OFF”.
Turning the % Marker ON/OFF
2. After step 1 has been completed, press the “% Marker” soft key and
select “ON” or “OFF”.
DISPLAY(DISPLAY
FORM) key
SHIFT key

Explanation
Graticule
The graticule type can be selected from the following two types. The default is “GRID”.
FRAME GRID

Scale
The cross type scale, shown below, can be turned ON or OFF. The default is “ON”.
Scale ON Scale OFF

% Marker
The % marker, shown below, can be turned ON or OFF. The default is “OFF”.

7-14 IM 701510-01E
 7.10 Turning the Waveform Information Display ON/
OFF
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the SHIFT + DISPLAY (DISPLAY FORM) key to display the
display condition setting menu.
2. Press the “Wave Info” soft key and select either “ON” or “OFF”.
Soft keys

DISPLAY(DISPLAY
FORM) key
SHIFT key
Explanation
Selecting the waveform information display ON/OFF
The information display can be selected “ON” or “OFF”. The default is “ON”.
OFF Displays only the time axis setting, acquisition mode, and sample rate. This is useful
if the displayed waveform information prevents observation of other waveforms.
ON Displays the channel No./ voltage axis sensitivity settings/ input coupling/ probe
7
attenuation as shown below in addition to the “OFF” display. For DL1520/DL1520L,

Changing Acquisition and Display Conditions

CH3 and CH4 are not displayed.
Channel No.
Voltage axis sensitivity

Probe attenuation
Input coupling

Points to note concerning the waveform information display

• If a recalled waveform is displayed, the memory number and the voltage axis sensitivity
will be displayed.
• If P-P waveform data loaded from a floppy disk is displayed, the file name and the
voltage axis sensitivity will be displayed. Up to 8 characters of the file name will be
displayed, but overlap may occur with other displayed file names (depending on the size
of the used characters).
• If ACQ waveform data loaded from a floppy disk is displayed, the channel No., voltage
axis sensitivity, input coupling and probe attenuation will all be displayed at the site of
the waveform. The channel No. of the channel for which acquisition has been halted (i.e.
for which “ACQ Hold” is set to “ON”) will be highlighted.

IM 701510-01E 7-15
 7.11 Changing the Screen Intensity

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + DISPLAY (DISPLAY FORM) key to display the
display condition setting menu.
2. Press the “Inten” soft key to display intensity selection menu.
Soft keys

3. Press the soft key corresponding to the item for which the intensity is
to be changed.

DISPLAY(DISPLAY
FORM) key 4. Turn the rotary knob to set the desired intensity.
SHIFT key

5. Repeat step 3 and 4 to adjust the intensity of other items.

Explanation
Intensity
Intensity can be set to one of 15 levels, with the darkest intensity “1” and the brightest
intensity “15”.

Items for which the intensity can be adjusted

Intensity can be adjusted independently for the following items. The value in ( ) indicates
the default setting.
TEXT (9) : Characters, value
SCALE (6) : Graticule, scale, % marker
CURSOR (10) : Cursor
SNAPSHOT (5) : Snapshot waveform
WAVE (8) : All waveform except snapshot
ALL (8) : The entire screen

7-16 IM 701510-01E
 8.1 Measuring a V-T Waveform using Cursors

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting
menu.
2. Press the “Cursor” soft key and select “ON”.
Soft keys 3. Press the “Type” soft key to display the measurement type selection
menu.

Measuring time difference/ frequency/ voltage/ voltage

difference using the vertical cursors
CURSOR key 4. Press the “V-T” soft key to display the cursor selection menu. Two
vertical cursors will appear on the screen.
<, > keys

5. Press the “Trace” soft key to display the trace selection menu.

6. Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to measure.
For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “1”, “2”, “MATH”, “LOAD1”, 8
“LOAD2” and “ALL” are displayed instead of the trace selection menu shown

Analyzing Waveforms
below.

7. After having pressed any of the “T1”, “T2” or “T1&T2” soft keys, use
the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor.

Measuring only the time difference using the vertical cursors

4. After step 3 has been completed, press the “dT” soft key to display the
cursor selection menu. Two vertical cursors will appear on the screen.

5. After having pressed any of the “T1”, “T2” or “T1&T2” soft keys, use
the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor.

Measuring only the voltage difference using the horizontal

cursors
4. After step 3 has been completed, press the “dV” soft key to display the
cursor selection menu. Two horizontal cursors will appear on the
screen.

5. Press the “Trace” soft key to display the trace selection menu.

IM 701510-01E 8-1
8.1 Measuring a V-T Waveform using Cursors

6. Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to measure.
For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “1”, “2”, “MATH”, “LOAD1” and
“LOAD2” are displayed instead of the trace selection menu shown below.

7. After having pressed any of the “H1”, “H2” or “H1&H2” soft keys,
use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor.

Explanation
Waveforms which cannot be measured using cursors
The following waveforms are excluded from measurements using cursors.
• Snapshot waveform;
• Accumulated waveforms other than the most recent one;
• Waveforms other than those which are specified (by Display Number) and displayed (by
Display Trace) using the sequential store or history memory function.

Selecting the measurement waveform: Trace

When “V-T” or “dV” has been selected at the type selection menu, the following can be
selected at the trace menu. The menu is divided into two menus, which can be reached using
the “PrevMenu” and “NextMenu” soft keys.
1-4 Measurements will only be performed on the selected trace;
LOAD1-4 Measurements will only be performed on the selected loaded waveform;
ALL (in case of “V-T” only) Measurements will be performed on all traces and
loaded waveforms.
* For DL1520/DL1520L, a selection menu is used to select one of “1”, “2”, “MATH”, “LOAD1”,
“LOAD2” and “ALL”. “ALL” is displayed only when “V-T” is selected as the target to be
measured.

T1 cursor T2 cursor Measurement items

The following items can be measured.
• Using vertical cursors to measure time difference/ frequency/ voltage/
voltage difference : V-T
In all cases excluding “ALL”
T1 Time difference between position of cursor T1 and trigger position
T2 Time difference between position of cursor T2 and trigger position
DT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2
1/DT Reciprocal of DT (frequency)
V1(X) Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T1
V2(X) Voltage at the position where the waveform intersects cursor T2
DV(X) V2-V1
H2 cursor
(X) indicates the waveform of measurement, e.g. LOAD1 is shown as (L1)
In the case of “ALL”
T1 Time difference between position of cursor T1 and trigger position*
T2 Time difference between position of cursor T2 and trigger position*
DT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2
1/DT Reciprocal of DT (frequency)
H1 cursor V1(X) Voltage at the position where all waveforms intersect cursor T1. The waveform
of measurement is indicated between brackets.
* In case of roll mode, this is not the trigger position, but the center of the acquisition memory
record length. This position is shown at the 0div in the figure on page 1-7.

• Using vertical cursors to only measure time difference : dT

DT Time difference between positions of cursors T1 and T2
1/DT Reciprocal of DT (frequency), for DL1520/DL1520L

• Using horizontal cursors to only measure voltage difference : dV

DV(X) V2-V1; where V2 is the position where the waveform intersects cursor H2, and
V1 is the position where the waveform intersects cursor H1.
8-2 IM 701510-01E
 8.1 Measuring a V-T Waveform using Cursors

Cursor movement method

The cursors can be selected as follows.
• Time measurement cursor (vertical)
T1 Moves cursor T1 only.
T2 Moves cursor T2 only.
T1&T2 Moves both cursors T1 and T2 simultaneously without changing the distance
between them.

• Voltage measurement cursor (horizontal)

H1 Moves cursor H1 only.
H2 Moves cursor H2 only.
H1&H2 Move both cursors H1 and H2 simultaneously without changing the distance
between them.

Cursor movement range

• Vertical cursor
Movement range : Each vertical cursor can be moved 0 500 1001
to 1002 different positions from the
left edge (–5.00 div) to the right
edge (5.00 div) of the waveform
display frame. One time position is
used for the P-P value of the
displayed waveform, and two points
(maximum and minimum) are
measured at this position.
The default setting : –2.50 div for T1, 2.50 div for T2 8

Analyzing Waveforms
• Horizontal cursor
Movement range : Each horizontal cursor can be 4.00 div
moved to 401 different positions
from the top (4.00 div) to the 0.00 div
bottom (–4.00 div) of the waveform
display frame. -4.00 div
The default setting : –2.00 div for H1, 2.00 div for H2

Voltage measurement using vertical cursors

When two voltage data (maximum and minimum) are displayed at the same time axis
position, moving a vertical cursor from left to right measures each datum in the order in
which it was sampled.

Sampling data
Vertical axis

4 The numbers indicate the order

5 in which the measurements
are performed.
Time axis

IM 701510-01E 8-3
8.1 Measuring a V-T Waveform using Cursors

Points to note when performing cursor measurements

• The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is
selected. However, the cursors cannot then be moved.
• Cursor-measured values will be cleared if the automated measurement function is turned
ON. However, pressing the CURSOR key (when “Cursor” is set to “ON”) will display
the cursor-measured values.
• If the GO/NO-GO “Mode” has been set to “ON” and the “GO/NOGO EXEC” soft key
has been pressed, the cursor measurement function will not operate even if the CURSOR
key is pressed. To operate the cursor measurement function, the GO/NO-GO “Mode”
must be set to “OFF”.
• In case the type selection menu is set to “V-T”, and a measured voltage value is
interpolation data, a “*” will be displayed with the measurement item.
• If measurement is not possible, “- - -” will be displayed.
• Cursor measurement is also possible for expanded waveforms. When switching the
display to show the expanded waveform, the position of the cursor on the screen does not
change. When both the pre-zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed, cursor
measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform.
• There might be cases where the displayed waveform is not in synchronization with the
measurement values. To synchronize, stop data acquistion.
• When using waveform computations, the displayed unit will become “div” for
waveforms obtained by addition/subtraction, and “V2” for waveforms obtained by
multiplication.
• In case engineering units have been set by the linear scaling function, the first three
characters of the unit setting will appear on the screen.
• Time is measured based on the T/div value set for the input signal waveform. Thus, be
careful if the T/div set for a loaded or recalled waveform does not match the T/div for the
input signal waveform.

8-4 IM 701510-01E
 8.2 Measuring an X-Y Waveform using Cursors

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Display both the T-Y and the X-Y waveform in the same display.
2. Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting
menu.
Soft keys 3. Press the “Cursor” soft key and select “ON”.
4. Press the “Type” soft key to display the measurement type selection
menu.

Measuring time difference/ voltage using the X-Y cursors

CURSOR key 5. Press the “X-Y” soft key. The X-Y cursors will appear on the screen.
<, > keys

6. Use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the X-Y cursor.

Measuring only voltage difference on the X axis using the vertical

cursors
5. After step 4 has been completed, press the “dX” soft key to display the 8
cursor setting menu. The vertical cursors will appear on the screen.

Analyzing Waveforms
6. After having pressed any of the “T1”, “T2” or “T1&T2” soft keys, use
the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor.

Measuring only voltage difference on the Y axis using the

horizontal cursors
5. After step 4 has been completed, press the “dY” soft key to display the
cursor setting menu. The horizontal cursors will appear on the screen.

6. After having pressed any of the “H1”, “H2” or “H1&H2” soft keys,
use the rotary knob to adjust the position of the cursor.

Explanation
Channel assignment for the X-Y axis
X-axis Input voltage of CH1
Y-axis Input voltage of CH2

Waveforms which cannot be measured

For waveforms which cannot be measured, refer to page 8-2.

IM 701510-01E 8-5
8.2 Measuring an X-Y Waveform using Cursors

Measurement items
The following items can be measured.
• Using X-Y cursors to measure time difference/ voltage : X-Y
T Time difference between position of vertical cursor and trigger position (the vertical
cursor is also displayed on the T-Y waveform in case the T-Y and X-Y waveform are
being displayed on the same screen)
X X-axis voltage at the position of the X-Y cursor (Voltage at the position where
waveform CH1 intersects the vertical cursor of the T-Y waveform)
Y Y-axis voltage at the position of the X-Y cursor (Voltage at the position where
waveform CH2 intersects the vertical cursor of the T-Y waveform)
T-Y waveform

Vertical cursor

Measurement
values
X-Y waveform
X-Y cursor

• Using vertical cursors to measure only voltage difference of the X-axis : dX

DX V2-V1; where V1 is the voltage at the X-axis where cursor T1 intersects, and V2 is
the voltage at the X-axis where cursor T2 intersects.
• Using horizontal cursors to measure only voltage difference of the Y-axis : dY
DY V2-V1; where V1 is the voltage at the Y-axis where cursor H1 intersects, and V2 is
the voltage at the Y-axis where cursor H2 intersects.

Cursor movement method

The cursors can be selected as follows.
• X-Y cursor
The X-Y cursor is indicated by a “+” symbol and moves over the X-Y waveform. In case
the display shows both the X-Y and the T-Y waveform, there will be only one vertical
cursor displayed, on the T-Y waveform. This cursor, related to the X-Y cursor, moves
over the time-axis.
• Vertical cursor
T1 Moves cursor T1 only.
T2 Moves cursor T2 only.
T1&T2 Moves both cursors T1 and T2 simultaneously without changing the distance
between them.
• Horizontal cursor
H1 Moves cursor H1 only.
H2 Moves cursor H2 only.
H1&H2 Moves both cursors H1 and H2 simultaneously without changing the distance
between them.

Cursor movement range

The X-Y cursor can only be moved over the X-Y waveform. For details regarding the
horizontal/vertical cursors, refer to page 8-3.

Points to note when performing cursor measurements

For more details regarding the points to note when performing cursor measurements, refer
to page 8-3.

8-6 IM 701510-01E
 8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Relevant Keys Rotary knob

SELECT key
RESET key
ESC key
Soft keys

MEASURE key

<, > keys

Operating Procedure
1. Press the MEASURE key to display the automated measurement setting menu.
2. Press the “Measure” soft key and select “ON”.

You can perform measurement both on displayed waveform data and on the corresponding
waveform values within acquisition memory. You first set the various conditions 8
(measurement range, measurement items, distal/proximal values, and channel delay). You

Analyzing Waveforms
can then start measurement of the displayed waveform data by pressing the “Measure” soft
key so that it comes ON.
DL1520, DL1520L, DL1540L,or DL1540 with a software (ROM) version of 1.13 or later,
are able to measure the actual (memory-resident) values. You must first stop waveform
acquisition, then you can execute the measurement by pressing the “ALL Scan EXEC” soft
key. Each press of the key takes a single measurement of the various waveform parameters,
using the memory-resident values corresponding to the displayed waveform data. The
measurement conditions (range, items, distal/proximal values, and channel delay) are the
same as those for the displayed data.

Setting the measurement range

The measurement range is determined by the two vertical cursors T1 and T2. The position
of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of measurement, and the position of cursor T2
indicates the end point.

3. After having pressed either the “T1”, or “T2” soft keys, use the rotary knob to adjust the
position of the cursor. You can also use the < or > keys.
T1 cursor T2 cursor

Measurement range

IM 701510-01E 8-7
8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Selecting the measurement items

The measurement items can be selected from 20 different ones. For the meaning of each
item, refer to the description on page 8-11.
4. Press the “Measure” soft key at the automated measurement setting menu to display
the item selection menu.
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trace or loaded waveform number.
For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “TRACE1”, “TRACE2”, “MATH”, “LOAD1” and
“LOAD2” are displayed instead of the trace/load waveform selection menu shown below.
6. Use the rotary knob to highlight the desired measurement item.
7. Press the SELECT key to select an item. The selection mark in front of the item will be
highlighted to indicate it has been selected. Press the SELECT key again to undo this,
or to reset all selection at once, press the “ALL CLEAR” soft key.
8. Repeat step 6 and 7 to select all the desired measurement items. The display of the
measurement items depends on the number of waveforms to be measured and the
selected items. Refer to page 8-13 for more details.

When selected, the mark

becomes .

Use the rotary knob to first

highlight an item, and then
(de)select it.

Switches between menus

For DL1520/DL1520L,
another menu is displayed.
Setting the distal/proximal values
The two levels which are used as the reference for the measurement of rise and fall times
can be set. For more details, refer to the description on page 8-11.
9. Use the rotary knob to select either the “PROX” or “DISTAL” setting and press the
SELECT key to display the value setting box.
10. Use the rotary knob to set the desired value. Press the RESET key to restore the new
value to the default value.
11. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the value setting box.
12. Repeat steps 9 to 11 to set either the “PROX” or “DISTAL” settings.
Value setting box;
set the value using the rotary knob.

13. Repeat steps 5 to 12 in case you want to select measurement items for another trace or
loaded waveform. In case you want to select the same measurement items for all traces
and loaded waveforms, select “Copy To All Trace” using the rotary knob and press
the SELECT key.

Returning to the top menu

14. Press the “To Topmenu” soft key or the ESC key to return to the automated
measurement setting menu.

8-8 IM 701510-01E
 8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Setting delay measurement between channels

The delay between channels is the time difference of the rising or falling edge between
traces or loaded waveforms. For each trace and loaded waveform, the waveform to be used
as a reference and the measurement waveform need to be specified.

Setting the measurement waveform

15. Press the “Delay Setup” soft key at the automated measurement setting menu to
display the delay selection menu.
16. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired trace or loaded waveform number which
will be subjected to measurement.
17. After having selected “Mode” using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key to select
“ON”. Pressing the SELECT key once more will result in selecting “OFF”.
18. After having selected “Edge Polarity” of the “Measure” setting using the rotary
knob, press the SELECT key to select rising edge or falling edge.
19. After having selected “Edge Count” of the “Measure” setting using the rotary knob,
press the SELECT key to display the count setting box.
20. Use the rotary knob to set the desired count number. Press the RESET key to restore
the new value to the default value.
21. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the count setting box.
22. After having selected “Threshold” of the “Measure” setting using the rotary knob,
press the SELECT key to set the delay detection level to “Volts” or “%”.
23. Use the rotary knob to select the screen below and press the SELECT key to display
the value setting box.
24. Use the rotary knob to set the desired value. Press the RESET key to restore the new
value to the default value.
25. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the value setting box. 8

Analyzing Waveforms
Setting the reference waveform
26. After steps 17 to 25 have been completed, and after having selected “Trace” of the
“Reference” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key to select the trace
or loaded waveform to be used as reference.
27. After having selected “Edge Polarity” of the “Reference” setting using the rotary
knob, press the SELECT key to select rising edge or falling edge.
28. After having selected “Edge Count” of the “Reference” setting using the rotary
knob, press the SELECT key to display the count setting box.
29. Use the rotary knob to set the desired count number. Press the RESET key to restore
the new value to the default value.
30. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the count setting box.
31. After having selected “Threshold” of the “Reference” setting using the rotary knob,
press the SELECT key to set the delay detection level to “Volts” or “%”.
32. Use the rotary knob to select the screen below and press the SELECT key to display
the value setting box.
33. Use the rotary knob to set the desired value. Press the RESET key to restore the new
value to the default value.
34. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the value setting box.
35. Repeat steps 16 to 34 in case you want to set delay measurement for other trace or
loaded waveforms.

Returning to the top menu

36. Press the “To Topmenu” soft key or the ESC key to return to the automated
measurement setting menu.

IM 701510-01E 8-9
8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Select ON when delay

measurement is to be done.

Set the measurement

conditions.

Selects the waveform of

reference. For DL1520/DL1520L,
TRACE1/TRACE2/MATH/LOAD1
/LOAD2 are displayed.
Sets the measurement
conditions of the reference
channel.

Switches between menus

For DL1520/DL1520L,
another menu is displayed.

Measurement range

1 count N1 count
Setting example
･Edge Polarity : (rising)
Reference Ground 100％
･Edge Count : N1(1 to 9)
waveform level 60％
･Threshold Level : 60％

Delay between channels

1 count N2 count
Setting example of measurement
waveform
･Edge Polarity : (falling)
･Edge Count : N2(1 to 9)
Measurement Ground 5V ･Threshold Level : 5V
waveform level

Measuring data in acquisition memory (applicable to DL1540 with a software

(ROM) version of 1.13 or later - refer to section 14.3, DL1520, DL1520L or DL1540L)
1. Set the measurement range, measurement items, distal/proximal values, and channel
delay to appropriate values. Then confirm that the “Measure” soft key in the automated
measurement setting menu (top menu) is set to “ON”.

• To execute measurement of memory data

2. Press the START/STOP key to halt waveform acquisition.
3. Press the “ALL Scan EXEC” soft key. The key name immediately changes to “ALL
Scan ABORT” and the oscilloscope begins executing a single measurement of the
relevant data in memory, while displaying progress on the screen. When measurement is
finished the key name changes back to “ALL Scan EXEC”.

Indicates progress of acquisition-memory data measurement.

• To abort measurement of memory data

4. The “ALL Scan ABORT” soft key remains on the screen while measurement is being
carried out. You can abort the measurement at any time by pressing this key. (The key
name will immediately change back to “ALL Scan EXEC”).

8-10 IM 701510-01E
 8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Explanation
Waveforms which cannot be measured
For waveforms which cannot be measured, refer to page 8-2.

Setting the measurement range : Time range

The measurement range is determined at the displayed time axis by the two vertical cursors
T1 and T2. The position of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of measurement, and the
position of cursor T2 indicates the end point. Automatic measurements will be carried on
data within this range.
The default measurement range is 10div (time axis).

Measurement items : Item Setup

Measurement items can be selected from 20 different types. Items can be selected separately
for each related waveform. The default is no items selected.
A maximum of 24 items can be displayed at once on the waveform display. This also
includes the values of delay measurement.
The method of displaying the measurement values depends on the number of selected traces
or loaded waveforms. Refer to page 8-13 for more details.
The items which can be selected are as follows.
• Measurement items related to the voltage axis
When measuring items such as rise time and fall time, “High” represents the voltage for
the most frequently occurring high amplitude (at 100% level), while “Low” represents
the voltage for the most frequently occurring low amplitude (at 0% level). They are
therefore different from “Max” and “Min”, which just represent the maximum and
minimum voltage respectively.
8
P-P : Peak to peak value (MAX - MIN) [V] UNDERSHOOT : Undershoot value
(P-P)* ( - Ovr)* (LOW - MIN)/(HIGH - LOW) x 100 [%]

Analyzing Waveforms
MAX : Maximum voltage [V] OVERSHOOT : Overshoot value
(Max)* ( + Ovr)* (MAX - HIGH)/(HIGH - LOW) x 100[%]
MIN : Minimum voltage [V] HIGH : High level voltage [V]
(Min)* (High)*
RMS : Root mean square value LOW : Low level voltage [V]
(Rms)* (1/ n )(∑(xi)2)1/2 [V] (Low)*
*( ) shows the corresponding name at the
AVG : Average voltage (1/n)∑xi [V]
(Avg)* measurement item setting screen.

MAX
HIGH

OVERSHOOT
P-P

UNDERSHOOT

LOW
MIN

• Measurement items related to the time axis

RISE : Rise time [s] + WIDTH : Width (s) greater than the mesial value
(Rise)* ( + Wd)*
FALL : Fall time [s] - WIDTH : Width (s) smaller than the mesial value
(Fall)* ( - Wd)*
FREQ : Frequency [Hz],1/PERIOD DUTY : Duty ratio + WITHDTH/PERIOD x 100[%]
(Freq)* (Duty)*
PERIOD : Period [s] *( ) shows the corresponding neme at the measurement item
(Prod)*
setting screen.
PERIOD
+ WIDTH - WIDTH
HIGH (100%)
Distal line (90%)

Mesial line (50%)

Proximal line (10%)

LOW(0%)

RISE FALL

IM 701510-01E 8-11
8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

• Other Measurement items

INTEG1TY(I1TY) Area of positive amplitude
INTEG2TY(I2TY) Area of positive amplitude - Area of negative amplitude
INTEG1XY(I1XY) Total sum of the triangular areas of the X-Y waveform
INTEG2XY(I2XY) Total sum of the trapezoid areas of the X-Y waveform

Note
For a detailed description of the area calculation method, refer to Appendix 4.

The “Prox” setting ranges from 0 to 49, in 1 % steps.

The “Distal” setting ranges from 50 to 100, in 1 % steps.

Delay between channels : Delay Setup

The delay between channels is the time difference of the rising or falling edge between
traces or loaded waveforms. For the relation between the channel of measurement and the
reference channel, refer to page 8-10.
Measurement starts when the “Mode” setting is set “ON”. The default setting is “OFF”.
The trigger slope can be either “ ” or “ ” and is selected at the “Edge Polarity” setting. The
default setting is “ ”. The number of times the trigger is activated is set at the “Edge
Count” setting, and can be set from 1 to 9. The default setting is “1”. The voltage level at
which triggering occurs is set at the “Threshold Level” setting, and can be selected from
“Volts” or “%”. The default setting is “0.0000 V”. This volts setting range is the voltage
value corresponding to ± 8 div. The setting step is 0.04 div. % can be set to a percentage of 0
to 100 %, where 100 % corresponds to the amplitude of “HIGH - LOW”. The setting step is
1 %.
The measurement values will be displayed as “Dly”.

Points to note relating to automated measurement

• The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is
selected. However, the cursors cannot then be moved.
• Values gathered by the automated measurement function will be cleared if the cursor
measurement function is turned ON. However, pressing the MEASURE key (when
“Measure” is set to “ON”) will display the automatically measured values.
• If the GO/NO-GO “Mode” has been set to “ON” and the “GO/NOGO EXEC” soft key
has been pressed, the automated measurement function will not operate even if the
MEASURE key is pressed. To operate the automated measurement function, the GO/NO-
GO “Mode” must be set to “OFF”.
• If measurement is not possible, “- - -” will be displayed.
• If two or more periods of the waveform lie within the measuring range, the first period
will be measured.
• Automated measurement is also possible for expanded waveforms. When switching the
display to show the expanded waveform, the position of the cursor on the screen does not
change. When both the pre-zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed, automated
measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform.
• Automated measurement is not synchronized with the update of the displayed waveform.
Hence, the displayed waveform may not match the measured values. To make the
displayed waveform match the automatic measurements, stop acquisition.
• When using waveform computations, the displayed unit will become “div” for
waveforms obtained by addition/subtraction, and “V2” for waveforms obtained by
multiplication.
• Time is measured based on the T/div value set for the input signal waveform. Thus, be
careful if the T/div set for a loaded or recalled waveform does not match the T/div for the
input signal waveform.
• Only the measurement items INTEG1XY and INTEG2XY can be displayed in case of the
X-Y display and T-Y & X-Y display.

8-12 IM 701510-01E
 8.3 Measuring Waveform Parameters Automatically

Display Example of measurement values

The number and type of measurement items which can be displayed at a screen together
with the waveform(s) depend on the number of waveforms under measurement.
Furthermore, if the number of measurement items exceeds the maximum which can be
displayed, the type of measurement items which will appear on the display is designated.
The following shows an example where the type of displayed measurement values is
designated.

• In case of one waveform under measurement

Measurement values of selected measurement items and delay between channels will all
be displayed.

• In case of two waveforms under measurement

Up to 12 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be
displayed. In case delay measurement is set “ON”, the maximum number of displayed
measurement items becomes 11.

• In case of three or four waveforms under measurement 8

Up to 6 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be

Analyzing Waveforms
displayed. In case delay measurement is set “ON”, the maximum number of displayed
measurement items becomes 5.

• In case of more than five waveforms under measurement

Up to 3 measurement values of selected measurement items of one waveform will be
displayed. In case delay measurement is set “ON”, the maximum number of displayed
measurement items becomes 2.

* MISC: Use of the Information menu or communications function enables output of all the
selected measured values, though the measured values cannot be updated by the Information
menu. When saving screen image data on a floppy disk in HP-GL or PostScript format, all the
selected items can be saved.

IM 701510-01E 8-13
 8.4 Using the Linear Scaling Function

Relevant Keys Rotary knob

SELECT key
RESET key
ESC key
Soft keys

MISC key

<, > keys

Operating Procedure
1. Press the MISC key to display the setting menu and press the “To NextMenu” soft
key.

2. Press the “Scale” soft key.

3. Press the “Mode” soft key and select “ON”. The “Setup” soft key will appear.

4. Press the “Setup” soft key to display the linear scaling setting menu.

In order to use the linear scaling function, it is necessary to select the waveform of
measurement, to set the coefficient A and the offset value B, and to apply a unit.

Selecting the waveform of measurement

5. Use the rotary knob to select the desired waveform of measurement.
6. Press the SELECT key to turn the “Mode” setting “ON”. Pressing the SELECT key
once more will result in selecting “OFF”.
For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “CH1”, “CH2”, “MATH”, “LOAD1” and
“LOAD2” are displayed instead of the linear scaling setting menu shown below.

8-14 IM 701510-01E
 8.4 Using the Linear Scaling Function

Setting the scaling coefficient A and the offset value B

7. Use the rotary knob to select the coefficient A of the measurement waveform and press
the SHIFT + MISC (KEYBOARD) key to display the keyboard.
8. Use the keyboard to enter the desired value. For details concerning operation of the
keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
9. Use the rotary knob to select the coefficient B of the measurement waveform and press
the SHIFT + MISC (KEYBOARD) key to display the keyboard.
10. Use the keyboard to enter the desired value. For details concerning operation of the
keyboard, refer to page 4-8.

Applying a unit
11. Use the rotary knob to select the “UNIT” setting and press the SELECT key to display
the keyboard.

12. Use the keyboard to enter desired unit. The unit will appear at the “units” setting on the
screen. For details regarding the usage of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
13. Repeat steps 5 to 12 in case you want to set the linear scaling function for other
waveforms.

Returning to the top menu

14. Press the ESC key to close the linear scaling setting menu.
15. Press the “To Topmenu” soft key to return to the MISC menu.

Explanation 8
Waveforms which cannot be measured

Analyzing Waveforms
For waveforms which cannot be measured, refer to page 8-2.

Setting the coefficient A and offset value B

If the setting range of A, B is within –3.4E38≤AX + B≤3.4E38*, the results will be
displayed. If the setting exceed this range, the display will show “- - -”. For an example,
refer to the next page.
The default setting is 0.000000E+00*.
* 1E38 represents 1x1038.

Setting the unit

This setting is useful to enter any unit. Up to eight characters can be input. Note however,
that only the first three characters will appear on the display.

Display Example of linear scaling results

The results of linear scaling will not appear on the display until data acquisition has been
started.
The scaling coefficient A, offset B, and new defined unit will be applied to measurement
values of cursor measurements and automated measurements. The following is a display
example of the results of automated measurement.
• When linear scaling is ON

• When linear scaling is OFF

IM 701510-01E 8-15
 8.5 Performing Waveform Math (Addition,
Subtraction and Multiplication)
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the MATH key to display the waveform math setting menu.
For DL1520, “Knob” menu for trace MATH which displays computa-
tion result is also displayed.
Soft keys Selecting the type of computation
2. Press the soft key corresponding to the math to be carried out.

Performing a phase shift

3. For DL1540/DL1540L, in case of computation of multiplication, press
MATH key the “Phase” soft key. For DL1520/DL1520L, open the “Knob” menu
first, then press the “Phase” soft key.
4. Turn the rotary knob to shift the phase. For DL1540/DL1540L, step 3
is not required if a MATH function other than multiplication is
selected.

Changing the display sensitivity of the computation result of

multiplication
3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “SENS” soft key.
4. Turn the rotary knob to adjust the sensitivity.

* For DL1520/DL1520L, the “POSITION” menu of the Knob menu

can be used to move the vertical position (trace MATH) in steps of
0.02 div.

Explanation
Types of computation
The following types can be selected. The default value is “OFF”.
OFF computation will not be carried out;
1+2(→→3) The result of adding waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as trace 3
(or MATH).
1–2(→→3) The result of subtracting waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as
trace 3 (or MATH).
1x2(→→3) The result of multiplying waveform data of CH1 and CH2 will be displayed as
trace 3 (or MATH).

Phase shift
Math can be performed with the phase of CH2 shifted. The setting range and steps are as
follows.
Setting range : ±5div
Setting steps : depending on the display record length. Refer to page 7-4 for more details.

Changing the display sensitivity of the computation result of multiplication

In order to observe the computation result better, the waveform size from the ground level
(display sensitivity) can be changed. The display sensitivity of the computation result of
multiplication is specified as follows.
Waveform size (from the ground level) of the computation result: Z=(SENS/2) x (XxY/2)
SENS set value using rotary knob (div)
X waveform size of channel 1 (compared to ground level)
Y waveform size of channel 2 (compared to ground level)
Setting ranges from 0.50 to 4.00 div.
Setting step is 0.01 div.

8-16 IM 701510-01E
 8.5 Performing Waveform Math (Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication)

Points to note relating to waveform computation

• Computation cannot be carried out on snapshot waveforms or recalled waveforms.
• Computation between channels is carried out using the original acquisition data which are
then displayed using P-P compression. In case the input coupling is AC and an offset
voltage is applied, the offset part will not be included in computation.
• Addition and subtraction computation is carried out regardless of the V/DIV setting of the
channels. Therefore, in case of cursor measurement or automated measurement of trace 3
(or MATH), the displayed unit will become “div”.
• The voltage axis sensitivity of channel 1 and 2 being V1 and V2 respectively, the voltage
axis sensitivity of the computation result becomes (4/SENS) x V1 x V2/div. Therefore, in
case of cursor measurement or automated measurement of trace 3 (or MATH), the
displayed unit will become “V2”.
• The computed waveform displayed on trace 3 (or MATH) is P-P compressed data. When
this data is stored or saved on the internal memory/floppy disk/SCSI device, information
indicating that this is a computed waveform and the voltage axis information after the
computation are not stored or saved. Therefore, if this data is recalled or loaded and then
a measurement is made using the cursors or automated measurement of waveform
parameters, correct values will not be displayed. To display the correct values, save the
waveform data on CH1 and CH2 from the acquisition memory to the floppy disk/SCSI
device as binary data. Then, load the data and redo the waveform computation.
Waveform data in the acquisition memory cannot be stored in the internal memory.
• If the computed result due to adding or subtracting is larger than 10.24 div or the result
due to multiplying is larger than 13 div, a chopped waveform will be displayed as in the
following diagram. This is due to the fact that the computed result exceeds the display
range.
8

Analyzing Waveforms
• Even if "OFF" is selected at the waveform math setting menu, the phase shift function is
still effective. To disable the phase shift function, set the phase shift to 0 div.

IM 701510-01E 8-17
 8.6 Displaying the Power Spectrum (Performing
FFT Computation)
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the SHIFT + MATH (FFT) key to display the FFT computation
setting menu.
2. Press the “FFT” soft key and select “ON”.
Soft keys

Selecting the waveform of measurement

3. Press the “Trace” soft key to display the trace selection menu.
4. Press the soft key corresponding to the trace you want to measure.
For DL1520DL1520L, menus such as “1”, “2” and “MATH” are
displayed instead of the trace selection menu shown below.
MATH(FFT) key

SHIFT key
Selecting the time window
3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “RECT” or the
“HANNING” soft key to select the time window.

Selecting the display format

3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “VT&FFT” or the “FFT”
soft key to select the display format.

Explanation
Waveforms on which FFT computation can be performed
The upper and lower limits of FFT computation can be performed on any one trace selectable from trace 1 to trace 4 (for
the power spectrum display
DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2/MATH).
take on fixed values depending
on the vertical sensitivity
(V/div) as shown in the figure Selecting the time window
below. They are not displayed The time window can be selected from the following window types.
on the screen.
RECT (rectangular window)
Upper
-limit Useful for transient signals which attenuate completely within the time
value window
HANNING Useful for signals which are continuous and not periodical
Lower
-limit
value FFT frequency band
Upper Lower Maximum 50 MHz
V/div -limit -limit
value value
(dBV) (dBV) Display format
5000 V 100 20 The display format depends on the expansion settings. Refer to page 7-5 for more details.
2000 V 90 10
1000 V 80 0
500 V 80 0 Points to note relating to displaying the power spectrum
200 V 70 ｰ10 • FFT computation is not possible in repetitive sampling mode or when the acquisition
100 V 60 ｰ20
50 V 60 ｰ20 mode is envelope mode.
20 V 50 ｰ30 • FFT computation is not possible when the Waveform’s Horizontal Position set except to
10 V 40 ｰ40
5V 40 ｰ40
0div.
2V 30 ｰ50 • The unit of the voltage axis is [dBV].
1V 20 ｰ60 • In case the waveform is expanded, FFT computation will be carried out on the expanded
500 mV 20 ｰ60
200 mV 10 ｰ70 range.
100 mV 0 ｰ80
50 mV 0 ｰ80
20 mV ｰ10 ｰ90
10 mV ｰ20 ｰ100
5 mV ｰ20 ｰ100
2 mV ｰ30 ｰ110
1 mV ｰ40 ｰ120

8-18 IM 701510-01E
 8.7 Measuring the Power Spectrum using Cursors

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Display the power spectrum. For details, refer to the previous page.
2. Press the CURSOR key to display the cursor measurement setting
menu.
Soft keys 3. Press the “Cursor” soft key and select “ON”.
4. After having pressed any of the “F1”, “F2” or “F1&F2” soft keys, use
the rotary knob to adjust the position of the vertical cursor. You may
also use the < or > key.

CURSOR key

<, > keys

Explanation
Waveforms which can be measured
Waveforms which can be measured are the same on which FFT computation can be
performed. Refer to the previous page for more details.
Measurement items
The following items can be measured.
F1(X) Frequency at the position of cursor F1.
F2(X) Frequency at the position of cursor F2.
DF(X) F2–F1
8
P1(X) Frequency level at the position of cursor F1.

Analyzing Waveforms
P2(X) Frequency level at the position of cursor F2.
DP(X) P2–P1
(X) indicates the waveform of measurement.
Cursor movement method
F1 cursor F2 cursor The cursors can be selected as follows.
F1 Moves cursor F1 only.
F2 Moves cursor F2 only.
F1&F2 Moves both cursors F1 and F2 simultaneously without changing the distance
between them.
Cursor movement range
Each vertical cursor can be moved to 501 different positions from the left edge (–5.00 div)
to the right edge (5.00 div) of the waveform display frame. However, there is no data at the
501 position of the rigth edge. Thus, when you move the cursor to this position, the display
will show “- - -”
The default setting is –2.50 div for T1 and 2.50 div for T2.
Points to note when performing cursor measurements
• The cursors and measured values will still be displayed even if a different menu is
selected. However, the cursors cannot then be moved.
• Cursor-measured values will be cleared if the automated measurement function is turned
ON. However, pressing the CURSOR key (when “Cursor” is set to “ON”) will display
the cursor-measured values.
• If the GO/NO-GO “Mode” has been set to “ON” and the “GO/NOGO EXEC” soft key
has been pressed, the cursor measurement function will not operate even if the CURSOR
key is pressed. To operate the cursor measurement function, the GO/NO-GO “Mode”
must be set to “OFF”.
• If measurement is not possible, “- - -” will be displayed.
• Cursor measurement is also possible for expanded waveforms. When switching the
display to show the expanded waveform, the position of the cursor on the screen does not
change. When both the pre-zoom and the expanded waveform are displayed, cursor
measurement will be performed on the expanded waveform.
• There might be cases where the displayed waveform is not in synchronization with the
measurement values. To synchronize, stop data acquistion.

IM 701510-01E 8-19
 9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Relevant Keys Rotary knob

SELECT key

ESC key
Soft keys

GO/NO-GO key

<, > keys

Operating Procedure
1. Press the GO/NO-GO key to display the GO/NO-GO setting menu.
2. Press the “Mode” soft key and select “ON”. The GO/NO-GO top menu appears.
3. Press the “ZONE” soft key. The default setting is “ZONE”.

When using the GO/NO-GO determination funtion, the following settings/selections can be
specified.
• Creating the determination zone (refer to page 9-1, 9-2);
• Saving the determination zone (refer to page 9-3);
• Redrawing/editing the saved determination zone (refer to page 9-3);
9
• Setting up the determination conditions (refer to page 9-4, 9-5);
trace conditions, determination logic, determination sequence, action after determination

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

• Executing and aborting the determination function (refer to page 9-5).

Note
The determination waveforms are saved in the internal memory. Old determination waveforms which are
already present in the internal memory, will be overwritten when new ones will be saved. An error
message will not appear. Therefore, verify before saving whether or not determination waveforms already
exist in the internal memory. Refer to steps 18 to 20.

Creating the Waveform

4. Press the “Edit...” soft key of the GO/NO-GO top menu. The zone creation menu will
appear.

5. Press the “NEW...” soft key and the base trace menu will appear.

6. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired base trace. To edit the entire waveform,
continue with step 7; to edit a part of the waveform, continue with step 10.
For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “TRACE1”, “TRACE2” and “MATH” are
displayed instead of the base trace menu shown below.

IM 701510-01E 9-1
9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Editing the whole waveform

7. Press the “WHOLE” soft key to display the editing menu. The default setting is
“WHOLE”.
8. After having pressed the “Move” soft key to select the editing direction, use the rotary
knob to edit the zone. You may also use the < or > keys.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “MOVE” setting.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “MOVE” setting, following the previous example.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “MOVE” setting, following the previous example.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “MOVE” setting, following the previous example.

9. Repeat step 8 until editing the waveform has been completed. To edit a part of the
waveform, continue with step 10; if editing has been completed, continue with step 14.

Editing a part of the waveform

10. After having completed step 6 or step 9, press the “PART” soft key to display the
editing menu.
11. After having pressed the “T-Range” soft key, select either “T1” or “T2” to set either
boudary of the setting range. Then use the rotary knob to edit the boundary position.
You may also use the < or > keys. Do this for both the left (T1) and right side boundary
(T2).
12. After having pressed the “Zone” soft key to select the editing direction, use the rotary
knob to edit the zone. You may also use the < or > keys.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “ZONE” setting, following the previous zone editing
example.

Example in case “ ” is set at the “ZONE” setting, following the previous example.

13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until partial editing of the waveform has been completed.

Completing editing the waveform

14. After having completed editing the waveform, press the “DONE” soft key to display the
saving menu.

9-2 IM 701510-01E
 9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Saving the determination zone

15. Select the field where the determination zone will be saved by pressing any of the
“ZONE1 - ZONE4” soft keys. The determination waveforms which have been saved in
ZONE1, ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4 can only be applied to trace1, 2, 3 (or MATH),
and 4 respectively. “ZONE4” is not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.
16. Execute saving by pressing the “STORE EXEC” soft key.

Note
The determination waveforms are saved in the internal memory. Old determination waveforms which are
already present in the internal memory, will be overwritten when new ones will be saved. An error
message will not appear. Therefore, verify before saving whether or not determination waveforms already
exist in the internal memory. Refer to steps 18 to 20.

17. Return to the GO/NO-GO top menu by pressing the “Quit & TopMenu” soft key.

Redrawing/editing the saved determination zone

18. Press the “Edit...” soft key of the GO/NO-GO top menu. The zone creation menu will
appear.

19. Press the “REDRAW...” soft key and the zone trace menu will appear.

20. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired zone you want to redraw. The saved
determination zone will appear. “ZONE4” is not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.

9
21. To edit the redrawn zone, repeat steps 7 to 14 on the previous page.

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

22. To save the edited redrawn zone, repeat steps 15 to 17.

IM 701510-01E 9-3
9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Setting up the determination conditions

23. Press the “Setup” soft key of the GO/NO-GO top menu. The condition setup menu will
appear.
24. After having selected the “Mode” setting of the trace to be measured using the rotary
knob, press the SELECT key to select “ON”. Pressing the key once again results in
selecting “OFF”, and no waveform determination will occur.
25. After having selected the “Condition” setting of the same trace using the rotary knob,
press the SELECT key to select the desired condition. When the condition is met,
“NO-GO” will result.
“OUT” : The waveform under measurement protrudes from the determination zone;
“IN” : The waveform under measurement enters the determination zone.
26. Repeat steps 24 and 25 for other traces if necessary.

Selecting AND or OR determination : Logic

27. After having selected the “Logic” setting on the condition setup menu, press the
SELECT key to select the desired condition. When the condition is met, “NO-GO” will
result.
“AND” : All determinations are “NO-GO”
“IN” : Any of the determination is “NO-GO”

Sequence determination
28. After having selected the “Sequence” setting on the condition setup menu, press the
SELECT key to select the desired sequence. The following types can be selected.
“SINGLE” : Stops determination when a “NO-GO” determination is made
“CONTINUE” : Carries out determination repeatedly until the “ABORT” soft key is
pressed

Setting action after determination

29. After having selected the “Action” setting on the condition setup menu, press the
SELECT key to select the desired action. After a “NO-GO” determination, the data can
be recorded in the following manners.
“NONE” : No action;
“PRINT” : A hardcopy of the screen will be printed out on the built-in printer;
“FD(P-P)” : All waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk
as P-P compressed data;
“FD(ACQ)” : Acquisition data of all waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved
to the floppy disk as binary data.
30. After having selected either “FD(P-P)” or “FD(ACQ)”, move to the
“FileName”setting and press the SELECT key. The keyboard will be displayed. After
having selected either “NONE” or “PRINT”, continue with step 32.
31. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the file. The entered filename will be displayed at
the “FileName”setting. For details how to operate the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.

Returning to the top menu

32. Return to the GO/NO-GO top menu by pressing the ESC key.

9-4 IM 701510-01E
 9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Sets determination conditions for each trace

(For DL1520/DL1520L, “Math” is provided instead of
“Trace3”. “Trace4” is not provided.)

Selects logic
Selects sequence
Selects action after determination
Enters the file name using the keyboard

Executing the determination function

33. Press the “EXEC” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to “ABORT”.

Display while GO/NO-GO judgement is in progress

Number of times GO/NO-GO judgement is performed

Number of times GO/NO-GO is made
Judgement results per trace
: GO
X : NO-GO
Corresponding to trace 1,2,3,4 – : Not under measurement
(For DL1520/DL1520L, trace 1,2,MATH)

Aborting the determination function

34. Press the “ABORT” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to “EXEC”. 9

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

IM 701510-01E 9-5
9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Explanation
Selecting the reference waveform: Base Trace
Selects the waveform on which the determination range is to be based. The reference
waveform can be selected from the following four types which can be displayed as
TRACE.
• Input signal waveform;
• ACQ waveform data (BIN data) loaded from a floppy disk;
• Computed waveform.

Editing the determination zone

Up to four determination zones can be set (for DL1520/DL1520L, up to three). The
determination zone can be specified by expanding the reference waveform vertically and
horizontally as follows.
• Setting range in the vertical direction ( , )
±8div from the reference waveform, setting step is 0.02div.
• Setting range in the horizontal direction ( , )
±5div from the center of the display, setting step is 0.02div.

File name in case of FD(P-P) or FD(ACQ) action

When the waveform data are being saved to the floppy disk, a file number (starting from
“0000”) is automatically assigned. It is possible to insert a common file name (character
string consisting of up to four characters) before the assigned file number (for instance
“NOGO0000”).
The entered file name is will be reset when the action becomes “NONE” or when GO/
NOGO determination is set to “OFF”.
The file name will be reset if the GO/NOGO determination is executed/aborted using EXEC
and ABORT soft keys.

Example of data format

After GO/NO-GO determination has been completed, the NO-GO counts, the date, time,
and the results for each trace will be saved automatically in the DL-MISC directory at the
floppy disc. The extension is “.GNG”. These files cannot be opened using this instrument;
use a personal computer for this purpose. In the example given below, “Math” is provided
instead of “Trace3” in the case of DL1520/DL1520L. “Trace4” is not provided.
JudgeCnt NoGoCnt Date Time Trace1 Trace2 Trace3 Trace4
3 1 95/03/03 10:10:10 Go NoGo Go G
5 2 95/03/03 10:10:12 NoGo Go NoGo Go
10 3 95/03/03 10:10:15 Go NoGo NoGo NoGo
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
100 100 95/03/03 10:23:10 Go NoGo NoGo Go

Forcing determination to stop and clearing the zone waveform

To force determination to stop, press the “ABORT” soft key or set “Mode” (at the GO/NO-
GO top menu) to “OFF”. To clear the displayed zone waveform, switch “Mode” (at the GO/
NO-GO top menu) to “OFF”.

9-6 IM 701510-01E
 9.1 Judging using a Waveform Zone

Points to note relating to zone determination

• Trigger mode is automatically switched to single short mode/single mode irrespective of
the selected trigger mode during GO/NO-GO determination. However, determination will
be repeated if the determination sequence has been set to “CONTINUE”. Even in case the
GO/NO-GO mode (at the GO/NO-GO top menu) is changed to OFF again, the setting at
the trigger mode selection will not become valid again.
• It is not possible to perform zone determination while both pre-zoom waveform and its
expanded waveform are displayed at the same time or while an FFT or X-Y waveform is
displayed. Neither is it possible to a display zone waveform. To perform GO/NO-GO
determination using a zone waveform, make sure that the expanded waveform alone is
displayed before “Mode” is set to “ON” (at the GO/NO-GO top menu).
• The following operations are not possible after having pressed the “EXEC” soft key. In
order to perform these operations, it is necessary to set “Mode” (at the GO/NO-GO top
menu) to “OFF”, after having pressed the “ABORT” soft key.
• Initialization of the settings • Automated measurements
• Auto set-up • Changing of expansion settings
• Cursor measurements • Display of an X-Y waveform
• Action on trigger
• A zone waveform is not displayed if the following conditions are not satisfied after the
zone waveform has been created.
• “Mode” at the GO NO-GO top menu : ON
• “GO/NO-GO Type” : ZONE
• “Mode” for selected trace : ON
• Display for selected trace : ON (corresponding LED is lit)
• During the time in which an action is being executed after GO/NO-GO determination, no
waveform data will be acquired.

Note
The zone waveform generated can be retained by saving the set-up data on a floppy disk. However, 9
“Mode” (at the GO NO-GO top menu) must be set to “ON” and “GO/NO-GO Type” to “ZONE”. For a
description of how to save set-up data on a floppy disk, refer to 12.4 “Saving and Loading Set-up Data”

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

(page 12-7).

IM 701510-01E 9-7
 9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform
Parameters
Relevant Keys Rotary knob
SELECT key
RESET key
ESC key
Soft keys

GO/NO-GO key

<, > keys

Operating Procedure
1. Press the GO/NO-GO key to display the GO/NO-GO setting menu.
2. Press the “Mode” soft key and select “ON”. The GO/NO-GO top menu appears.
3. Press the “PRMTR” soft key. The default setting is “ZONE”.

The parameters which can be selected/set at this setting consist of the following.
• Determination range (refer to page 9-8);
• Determination conditions, such as parameter setup, determination logic, sequence
determination, and action after determination (refer to page 9-9, 9-10);
• Executing/aborting determination after setting/selecting the parameters. (refer to page 9-
10).

Setting the determination range

4. After having pressed the “T-Range” soft key, select either “T1” or “T2” to set either
boudary of the determination range. Then use the rotary knob to edit the boundary
position. You may also use the < or > keys. Do this for both the left (T1) and right side
boundary (T2).
T1 cursor T2 cursor

Determination range

9-8 IM 701510-01E
 9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters

Setting the determination conditions

Parameter setup
5. Press the “Setup” soft key of the GO/NO-GO top menu. The parameter menu will
appear.
6. After having selected the “Mode” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT
key to select “ON”. Pressing the key once more results in selecting “OFF”.
7. After having selected the “Trace” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT
key to select the trace used for measurement. Selectable from “1” to “4” (for DL1520/
DL1520L, 1/2/Math).
8. After having selected the “Item” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key
to display the parameter setting screen.
9. Use the rotary knob to select the parameter of measurement. Press the SELECT key,
the setting screen will disappear, and the setting will be shown at the “Item” setting.

10. After having selected the “Upper” setting using the rotary knob, press the SHIFT +
MISC (KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard.
11. Use the keyboard to enter the desired value. For details concerning operation of the
keyboard, refer to page 4-7.
12. After having selected the “Lower” setting using the rotary knob, press the SHIFT + 9
MISC (KEYBOARD key to display the keyboard.

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

13. Use the keyboard to enter the desired value. For details concerning operation of the
keyboard, refer to page 4-7.
14. After having selected the “Condition” setting using the rotary knob, press the
SELECT key to select the condition setting. When the condition is met, “NO-GO” will
result.
“OUT” : The value of the measurement parameter lies outside the values determined
by the Upper and Lower values.
“IN” : The value of the measurement parameter lies inside the values determined by
the Upper and Lower values.
15. Repeat steps 6 to 14 until the parameter setup has been completed.

Determination Logic
16. After having selected the “Logic” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT
key to select the desired condition. When the condition is met, “NO-GO” will result.
“AND” : All determinations are “NO-GO”;
“IN” : Any of the determination is “NO-GO”.

Sequence determination
17. After having selected the “Sequence” setting on using the rotary knob, press the
SELECT key to select the desired sequence. The following types can be selected.
“SINGLE” : Stops determination when a “NO-GO” determination is made;
“CONTINUE” : Carries out determination repeatedly until the “ABORT” soft key is
pressed.

IM 701510-01E 9-9
9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters

Setting action after determination

18. After having selected the “Action” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT
key to select the desired action. After a “NO-GO” determination, the data can be
recorded in the following manners.
“NONE” : No action;
“PRINT” : A hardcopy of the screen will be printed out on the built-in printer;
“FD(P-P)” : All waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved to the floppy disk
as P-P compressed data;
“FD(ACQ)” : Acquisition data of all waveforms displayed on the screen will be saved
to the floppy disk as binary data.
19. After having selected either “FD(P-P)” or “FD(ACQ)”, move to the
“FileName”setting and press the SELECT key. The keyboard will be displayed. After
having selected either “NONE” or “PRINT”, continue with step 21.
20. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the file. The entered filename will be displayed at
the “FileName”setting. For details how to operate the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.

Returning to the top menu

21. Return to the GO/NO-GO top menu by pressing the ESC key.

Sets determination conditions for each parameter

(For DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2/Math is provided
instead of 1/2/3/4/ in Tracemenu.)

Selects logic
Selects sequence
Selects action after determination
Enters the file name using the keyboard

Executing the determination function

22. Press the “EXEC” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to “ABORT”.

For the display which appears during measurement, refer to page 9-5.

Aborting the determination function

23. Press the “ABORT” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to “EXEC”.

9-10 IM 701510-01E
 9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters

Explanation
Selecting the waveforms to be judged
Input signal waveforms which are displayed as trace Nos. 1 to 4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, 1/
2/Math) can be judged. Computed waveforms can also be judged. Acquisition-memory data
is not available.

Setting the determination range: T-Range

The range of determination is set by the two cursors T1 and T2. The setting lies within
–5.00 div at the left side to +5.00 div at the right side measured from the center of the
display.
Note that this range is different from the one used for automated measurements.

Selecting waveform parameters and setting the range: Item, Upper, Lower
Up to four waveform parameters can be selected from the following items. If you do not
know the upper-limit or lower-limit, set the +side of the setting range, or (when the
keyboard shows this settings) select “NAN” (Ignore). In the latter case, the display will
show “XXX” at the corresponding setting.
For the meaning of each item, refer to page 8-10.
Each parameter can be set within the range given in the table below.

Measurement item Upper-/lower-limit setting range Setting step

Max, Min, High, Low
P-P, AVG, RMS ± 8 div 0.04 div
+Overshoot, -Overshoot 0 to 200 % 1%
+Duty, -Duty 0 to 100 % 1%
Freq * 0.02 to 10 div –
Period, Rise, Fall
+Width, -Width 0 to 10 div 0.01 div
Delay , Delay –10 to 10 div 0.01 div
9
INTEG1TY, INTEG2TY ±3.4x1038 –

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

INTEG1XY, INTEG2XY
* The setting step is not constant since the frequency is the reciprocal of the period.

File name in case of FD(P-P) or FD(ACQ) action

When the waveform data are being saved to the floppy disk, a file number (starting from
“0001”) is automatically assigned. It is possible to insert a common file name (character
string consisting of up to four characters) before the assigned file number (for instance
“NOGO0001”).
The entered file name will be reset when the action becomes “NONE” or when GO/NOGO
determination is set to “OFF”.
The file name will not be reset if the GO/NOGO determination is executed/aborted using
EXEC and ABORT soft keys.

Example of data format

In case of NO-GO determination, the measurement values will appear. For the other
contents, refer to page 9-6.
JudgeCnt NoGoCnt Date Time Param1(T1/P-P) Param2(T2/Max) ···
3 1 95/03/03 10:10:10 Go 2.000e+02V ···
5 2 95/03/03 10:10:12 1.000e+02V Go ···
10 3 95/03/03 10:10:15 Go 1.500e+02V ···
• • • • • • ···
• • • • • • ···
• • • • • • ···
• • • • • • ···
100 100 95/03/03 10:23:10 Go 1.950e+02V ···

Forcing determination to stop

To force determination to stop, press the “ABORT” soft key or set “Mode” (at the GO/NO-
GO top menu) to “OFF”.

IM 701510-01E 9-11
9.2 Judging using Measured Values of Waveform Parameters

Points to note relating to parameter determination

• Trigger mode is automatically switched to single mode irrespective of the selected trigger
mode during GO/NO-GO determination. However, determination will be repeated if the
determination sequence has been set to “CONTINUE”. Even in case the GO/NO-GO
mode (at the GO/NO-GO top menu) is changed to OFF again, the setting at the trigger
mode selection will not become valid again.
• While both pre-zoom waveform and its expanded waveform are displayed at the same
time, the expanded waveform will become the object of determination.
• The following operations are not possible after having pressed the “EXEC” soft key. In
order to perform these operations, it is necessary to set “Mode” (at the GO/NO-GO top
menu) to “OFF”, after having pressed the “ABORT” soft key.
• Initialization of the settings • Automated measurements
• Auto set-up • Changing of expansion settings
• Cursor measurements • Display of an X-Y waveform
• Action-on trigger
• During an action is being executed after GO/NO-GO determination, no waveform data
will be acquired.
• In case the linear scaling function has been set to ON, you can enter linear scaled values
at the GO/NO-GO parameter setting menu.
• Only waveforms displayed on screen are available for judgment. Acquisition-memory
data is not available.

9-12 IM 701510-01E
 9.3 Using the GO/NO-GO Signal Output
Function(for DL1540/DL1540L)
Output Signal
NO-GO OUT signal
The output signal level (TTL level) changes from high to low (L) temporarily when a “NO-
GO” determination is made.

GO OUT signal
The output signal level (TTL level) changes from high to low (L) temporarily when a “GO”
determination is made.

Signal output circuit diagram

5V 5V

LS06
2.2 kΩ

51 Ω

Output Connector

Pin No. Signal name

1 NO-GO OUT
Pin configuration
2 GND
25 24 23
OPTION
3 2 1 Pin No. 26 GO OUT 9
27 GND

Performing a GO/NO-GO Action

* Only use pin No. 1, 2, 26, and 27.
50 49 48 28 27 26 Other pins are used for other
communication purposes.

Output Timing
Output timing
EXEC
10ms
or more
Acquisition Acquisition

Determination Determination
Result Result
NOGO OUT
GO OUT
Remains 'Low' until the system
is ready for the next judgement
(or for longer if the data is to
be output to the built-in printer
or to a floppy disk).

IM 701510-01E 9-13
9.3 Using the GO/NO-GO Signal Output Function (for DL1540/DL1540L)

Connecting to Another Instrument

Use the dedicated half-pitch interface cable (B9920TA) to connect each terminal to the
terminals of another instrument.
A DC voltage of 5 V is always present on the output terminals. Thus, take care when you
connect to another instrument or when you touch the “NO-GO OUT” terminal.

CAUTION • Never apply an external voltage to the NO-GO OUT and GO OUT terminals,
otherwise damage to the instrument may result.
• When connecting the GO/NO-GO signal output externally, make sure not to
connect other signal pins by mistake. Errors in connection may cause damage
to this instrument or to the other connected instrument.

9-14 IM 701510-01E
 10.1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built-in Printer

Printer Roll Charts

Use only YOKOGAWA’s roll charts (the same type as the one supplied with the instrument)
with the built-in printer.

When Roll Charts have Run out

When your roll charts have run out, purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales
representatives as listed on the back cover of this manual. Price information can be obtained
from them.

Part No. : B9850NX

Specification : Thermo-sensible, 30 m
Minimum quantity : 5 rolls

Handling the Roll Chart

Thermo-sensible roll charts generate color using a thermal reaction, therefore the following
precautions must be taken.

Storage precautions
The roll chart begins to develop color at approximately 70 °C. It is very sensitive to heat,
damp, light and chemicals both before and after use.
• Keep roll charts in a dry, cool and dark place.
• Once the package is opened, use the roll chart as soon as possible.
• If the roll chart is left in contact with plastic films containing plasticizer (for instance,
vinyl chloride film, cellophane tape etc.) for a long period of time, discoloration will
occur on the recording area of the chart due to the plasticizer. If you are going to keep the
roll chart in a holder, for instance, use a polypropylene holder.
• When you use adhesive on the roll chart, never use adhesive which contains an organic
solvent such as alcohol or ether, otherwise color may develop on the chart.
• When you are going to store recorded roll charts for a long period of time, we suggest
10
you make a copy of the charts since discoloration of the originals may occur.

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and
Usage precautions
• Use only YOKOGAWA’s genuine roll charts.
• Do not touch the roll chart with sweaty hands.
• Do not rub the surface of the roll chart hard with a solid object: color development may
occur due to frictional heat.
• Do not allow chemicals or oil to come into contact with the roll chart, otherwise color
development or loss of information may result.
• The chart paper might show some discoloration due to friction after the instrument is
moved with the roll paper installed. Therefore it is recommended to remove and re-install
the chart paper before moving.

IM 701510-01E 10-1
10.1 Loading a Chart in the Optional Built-in Printer

Loading Procedure
Push the printer cover firmly at the point of the push
mark.
The cover springs open, allowing you to open it.

There is a release arm located at the upper right side.

Viewing it from the angle as in the figure, move it from
left to right.

Hold the chart so that the end of the chart faces away
from you, and then place the roll in the provided space,
as shown in the figure.

Insert the end of the roll into the gap beneath the black
guides so that the chart protrudes approximately 10 cm
from above the guides. The paper can be inserted easily
after cutting off both corners of the end of the paper.

Rotate the chart to make sure that it is properly aligned

and stretched out, then secure the chart paper by sliding
the release arm back into its old position.
If the release arm is not put back in its old position, an
error message will be displayed when printing is
performed.

Half close the printer cover, insert the end of the chart
through the paper slot in the cover, and then close it.
Push the cover firmly at the point marked until it clicks
into place.

10-2 IM 701510-01E
 10.2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information
using the Optional Built-in Printer
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hardcopy
setting menu.
ESC key 2. Press the “PRNTER” soft key to display the printout type selection
Soft keys menu. “CENTR” menu is also provided with DL1520/DL1520L with
suffix code -C3.

Selecting additional information

3. Press the “Info” soft key to select “OFF” or “ON”.
COPY(MENU) key Selecting the type of printout
SHIFT key 4. Select from “SHORT”, “LONG” or “REAL”. If “SHORT” is
<, > keys
selected, read chapter 11; If “REAL” is selected, refer to page 10-10.

Long copy
Setting the printing range
5. Press the “LONG” soft key and the “Range” soft key will appear.
The display will automatically show the pre-zoom and expanded
waveform.

6. Press the “Range” soft key to display the printing range setting menu.
7. After having pressed either the “T1” or “T2” soft keys, use the rotary
knob to adjust the position of the cursor. You can also use the < or >
keys. The position of cursor T1 indicates the starting point of printing, 10
and the position point of cursor T2 indicates the end point of printing.

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and
Setting the zoom value
8. After having pressed the “ZOOM” soft key, use the rotary knob to
adjust the zoom value.

Verifying the waveform to be printed

9. Press the “BOX POS” soft key to move the zoom box to the desired
printing range. This allows you to verify which part of the waveform
will be printed.

10. Press the ESC key to close the printing range setting menu.

Outputting to the printer

11. Press the COPY key to execute the printing.

Aborting the printing

12. After having performed step 11, press the COPY key again to abort
the printing.

IM 701510-01E 10-3
10.2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built-in Printer

Explanation
Contents of hardcopy
• Displayed waveforms;
• Ground display (such as graticule, measured values);
• Menu;
• Setting information such as filter, offset, display record length and trigger settings (only
in case printing type is set to “SHORT”).

Additional information: Addition Info

The following additional information (setup and waveform parameters) can also be output.
To output the hardcopy only, select “OFF”.
Setup Information

Measurement Values of Waveform Parameters

Setting the printing type

SHORT (short copy)
Select this type of output if you want to output an exact copy of the screen. It looks as the
figure below.

Printout of the exact copy of the screen

Printout of filter settings, offset values,

record lengths and trigger settings

10-4 IM 701510-01E
 10.2 Printing Waveforms and Additional Information using the Optional Built-in Printer

LONG (long copy)

Select this type of output if you want to output normal waveforms on screen as expanded
waveforms. The following settings must be made.
• Setting the printing range; Sets from where to where printing will be done. 10div of the
time axis will be printed on one page. A printout page will always be filled up to 10div,
and therefore more of the waveform might be printed than specified by the printing
range.
• Setting the expansion rate; For setting limits and expansion rate, refer to page x.x This
setting is not necessary if expanded waveforms have already been displayed before the
hardcopy output setting menu is displayed and you do not want to change the expansion
rate.
1 page

Number of pages

After having selected the long copy and having closed the hard copy setting menu, the
display will still be according to the MainZoom display mode. To display normal
waveforms only, press the ZOOM key and select OFF or MAIN.

Note
The printer density can be adjusted. For more details, refer to page 14-4.
10

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and

IM 701510-01E 10-5
 10.3 Real-Time Printing using the Optional Built-in
Printer
Keys and Procedure
1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hardcopy
setting menu. “CENTR” menu is also provided with DL1520/
DL1520L with suffix code -C3.
Soft keys

2. Press the “PRNTR” soft key to display the printout type selection
menu.
3. Press the “REAL” soft key.

COPY(MENU) key
SHIFT key
Outputting to the printer
4. Press the COPY key to execute the printing.

Aborting the printing

5. After having performed step 4, press the COPY key again to abort the
printing.

Explanation
Chart speed
The chart speed depends on the time axis setting as shown in the table below.

Time axis setting Chart Speed

500 ms/div 16.67 mm/s
1 s/div 8.33 mm/s
2 s/div 4.17 mm/s
5 s/div 1.67 mm/s
10 s/div 0.83 mm/s
20 s/div 0.42 mm/s
50 s/div 0.17 mm/s

Points to note when printing real-time

Before carrying out real-time printing, verify the following settings.
• The trigger mode should be set to Auto mode or Auto Level mode;
• The history memory function should be set to OFF;
• The time base should be selected INT;
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, the record length must be set to 10 K or 100 K.
• The time axis setting should lie within 500 ms/div to 50 s/div;
• Waveform acquisition should be started.
During real-time printing, only the execution/abortion operations are valid.
During real-time printing, the cursor measurements and waveform parameter measurements
will be halted.
When you press the START/STOP key during real time printing, data acquisition will stop
and therefore real-time printing will also stop. Pressing the START/STOP key again results
in resuming data acquisition and therefore real-time printing.
Real-time printing is not possible during ZOOM/MainZoom display, X-Y display or when
loaded/recalled waveforms are being displayed.

10-6 IM 701510-01E
 10.4 Connecting an External Plotter

Compatible Plotters
Any plotter which accepts HP-GL commands can be used.
However, the plotting range varies according to the model, causing loss of output data on
some plots.

Communications Settings
This instrument
Initiating output to the plotter will switch this instrument to talk-only mode automatically.
Plotter
Set the plotter to listen-only mode.

Note
• For a description of the GP-IB interface, refer to the “Communication Interface User’s Manual” (IM
701510-11E).
• For DL1520 with suffix code -C1/-C3 or DL1520L with suffix code -C1/-C3/-C4, enable to connect
the external plotter to the instrument.

Connecting Procedure
1. Turn OFF the power to both the instrument and the plotter.
2. Connect the plotter to the instrument using the GP-IB cable.
After the plotter is connected, tighten the screws firmly.
GP-IB connector

10

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and
GP-IB cable

IM 701510-01E 10-7
 10.5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional
Information using an External Plotter
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hardcopy
SELECT key setting menu.
ESC key
2. Press the “PLTR...” soft key.
Soft keys “CENTR” menu is also provided with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix
code -C3.

3. Press the “Setup” soft key to display the plotter setup menu.

COPY(MENU) key Selecting the paper size

SHIFT key 4. After having selected the “Paper Size” setting using the rotary knob,
<, > keys
press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size.
Selecting the pen speed
5. After having selected the “Pen Speed” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “NORMAL” or “SLOW”.
Selecting the XY Mode
6. After having selected the “XY Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “DOT” or “LINE”.
Assigning pens
7. After having selected the “Pen Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “AUTO” or “MANUAL”.
In case of AUTO
8. After having selected “AUTO”, and after having selected the “Auto
Pen” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key to display
the setting frame.
9. Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens. Press the RESET key
to return the default value. Continue with step 10.
In case of MANUAL
8. After having selected “MANUAL”, use the rotary knob and the
SELECT key to set the “Grid Pen” setting, the “TRACE1 Pen -
TRACE4 Pen (for DL1520/DL1520L, TRACE1/TRACE2/MATH)”
setting and the “LOAD1 Pen - LOAD4 Pen (for DL1520/DL1520L,
LOAD1/LOAD2)” setting.
9. Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers. Press the RESET key to
return the default value.
Closing the plotter setup menu
10. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame.
11. Press the ESC key to close the setting menu.

Outputting to the external plotter

12. Press the COPY key.

Aborting the printing

13. After having performed step 12, press the COPY key again to abort
the printing.

10-8 IM 701510-01E
 10.5 Printing Displayed Waveforms and Additional Information using an External Plotter

Explanation
Selecting the paper size
The contents of printing, paper size, printing size and printing location can be selected from
the following eight types. However, only one type of output can be selected at a time. “A5-
Upper WAVE” and “A5-Lower WAVE” allow output of two A5-sized screens of information
on a sheet of A4 paper.

Setting Output item Output size Output location

A3-WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle
A3-SETUP Set-up parameters A3 Middle
A4-WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle
A4-SETUP Set-up parameters A4 Middle
A5-Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower SETUP Set-up parameters A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half

Selecting the pen speed

The pen speed can be selected from the following two speeds.
NORM Plots at the default speed setting.
SLOW Plots at a speed of 10 cm/s.

Selecting the pen assignment method: Pen Mode

The pens can be assigned according to the following two methods.
AUTO Assigns pens automatically, as shown in the table below, according to the number
of pens.

Number of GRID TRACE LOAD

installed pens 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
(MATH) 10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and
2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2
3 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1
5 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5

MANUAL A particular pen can be assigned to the graticule, to TRACE1 to 4 (for DL1520/
DL1520L, 1/2/MATH) and to LOAD 1 to 4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2). The
pen numbers that can be assigned are 0 to 12. If “0” is selected, no plotting is
performed for the corresponding item.

Assignment of pens to the grid, trace and load

The grid, TRACE1 to TRACE4 and LOAD 1 to LOAD4 can have pens assigned to them as
follows.

Setting Assignment for hardcopy

Grid Graticule, all cursors, trigger position mark, date and time, comments, setup
information list, measurement values
TRACE1 Trace1 waveform, ground level, trigger level mark, voltage axis conditions,
input coupling, probe attenuation
TRACE2 to 4 Same as Trace1
(for DL1520/DL1520L, 2/MATH)
LOAD1 to 4
(for DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2)

Note
For DL1520 with suffix code -C1/-C3 or DL1520L with suffix code -C1/-C3/-C4, enable to print displayed
waveforms and additional information.

IM 701510-01E 10-9
 10.6 Entering a Comment

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hardcopy
setting menu.
Entering comments
Soft keys 2. Press the “Keyboard” soft key to display the keyboard.
“CENTR” menu is also provided with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix
code -C3.

3. Use the keyboard to enter the comment. For details regarding the
usage of the keyboard, refer to page x.x.
COPY(MENU) key
SHIFT key

Displaying comments
4. Press the “Comment” soft key to select “ON”. Pressing the soft key
once again results in “OFF”.and therefore comments will not be
displayed.

Explanation
Number of characters which can be entered
Up to 25 characters may be entered.

Displaying a comment
The comment will appear above the waveform display frame, as shown in the figure below.
Comment

Clearing the comment

Press the “EXEC” soft key in the hardcopy setting menu or display another menu. The
comment will be cleared.

Points to note when entering a comment

The displayed comment may overlap the messages which occur during waveform
acquisition. When you want to display the comment in such a case, turn off data acquisition,
and set the “Comment” setting on the hardcopy setting menu to “ON” once again.

10-10 IM 701510-01E
 10.7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer
(for DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -C3)
Keys and Procedure 1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hardcopy
setting menu.
2. Press the “CENTR...” soft key to display the external printer selection
menu.
Soft keys

3. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired external printer.

DL1520 with software (ROM) version before 1.30 does not display
the “PCL5” menu.

COPY(MENU) key
SHIFT key Outputting to the external printer
4. Press the COPY key.
Aborting the printing
5. After having performed step4, press the COPY key again to abort the
printing.
Explanation
Centronics interface
Centronics interface is a typical interface used to transfer print data and is employed in
many printers. DL1520/DL1520L can print screen image to a printer which supports the
following print formats.
External printer type: Format
Select from ESC/P, LIPS, PR201 or PCL5. DL1520 with software (ROM) version before
1.30 can not select “PCL5.”
Print type
Same as SHORT (short copy) on page 10-4. However, the setting information will not be
printed for DL1520 with software (ROM) version before 1.30 when using ESC/P.
Points to note when printing the screen image to an external printer 10
• DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -C3 only can output to the external printer.

Setting Parameters to the Printer/Plotter

Outputting Displayed Waveforms and
• Connect the external printer to DL1520/DL1520L using the printer connecting cable of
standard accessories.
• With some printers, the screen image cannot be printed properly. If this problem
continues to occur, even when the printer has been adjusted, contact the printer’s
manufacturer.
• It is possible to print the screen image to a printer connected to a personal computer.
Save the screen image data to a floppy disk as described in Section 12.5, “Saving Screen
Image Data”, then open the data using the computer and print it.
Note
DL1520/DL1520L doesn't be recognizable errors (example, the chart end) of external printer. In case of
occuring the errors, if DL1520/DL1520L is executed to output to the external printer, aborting the printing
by pressing the COPY key.

Pin configuration of Centronics connector(the rear panel side of DL1520/DL1520L)

and D-sub socket(the Printer connecting cable B9916TB side)
Centronics connector Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
18 17 16 3 2 1 Pin No.
1 STROBE 16 INIT(Initializing of printer)
2 DATA0(Print data bit0) 17 SLCTIN(Select in)
18 GND
36 35 34 21 20 19 9 DATA7(Print data bit7)
(Rear panel side of DL1520/DL1520L) 10 ACK(Acknowledge) 25 GND
11 BUSY 26 NC(No connection)
D-sub socket 12 NC(No connection)
13 12 11 3 2 1 Pin No.
13 SLCT(Select) 36 NC(No connection)
14 AFDXT(Auto feed transfer)
15 NC(No connection)

*Pin nos. of Centronics connector and D-sub socket are same each to each,
25 24 23 16 15 14 but pin nos. 26 to 36 are not provided with D-sub socket.
(Printer connecting cable B9916TB side)

IM 701510-01E 10-11
10.7 Printing the Screen Image to an External Printer (for DL1520/DL1520L Having Suffix Code -C3 )

Print example
• ESC/P: Printed by EPSON MJ-700V2C
The setting information is not printed for DL1520 with software (ROM) version before
1.30.

• LIPS: Printed by Canon LASER SHOT A404F

• PR201: Printed by Canon LASER SHOT A404F PR201 emulation

• PCL5: Printed by HEWLETT PACKARD Laser Jet 5L

10-12 IM 701510-01E
 11.1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms

Keys and Procedure 1. Press the STORE/RECALL key to display the data type selection
menu.
Rotary knob
2. Press the “Wave” soft key to display the store/recall setting menu.

Soft keys
Storing a waveform
3. Press the “STORE” soft key to display the waveform store setting
menu. The default setting is “STORE”.

4. Press the “Source” soft key to display the source selection menu.
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the trace No. to be stored.
CH key
POSITION key For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “TRACE1”, “TRACE2” and
STORE/RECALL key “MATH” are displayed instead of the source selection menu shown
below.

6. Press the “Destn” soft key to display the memory selection menu.
7. Press the soft key corresponding to the memory in which the
waveform is to be stored.
“MEM#3” and “MEM#4” menus are not provided with DL1520/
DL1520L.

8. Press the “EXEC” soft key to execute waveform storing.

Recalling a waveform
3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “RECALL” soft key to
display the waveform recalling menu.

4. Press the “Source” soft key to display the recall memory selection 11
menu.

the Internal Memory

Storing and Recalling Data from
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the memory No. from which the
waveform is to be recalled.
“MEM#3” and “MEM#4” menus are not provided with DL1520/
DL1520L.

6. Press the “Destn” soft key to display the trace No. selection menu.
7. Press the soft key corresponding to the trace No. to be recalled.
“LOAD3” and “LOAD4” menus are not provided with DL1520/
DL1520L.

8. Press the “EXEC” soft key to execute waveform recalling.

Moving a recalled waveform

9. Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number
of the recalled waveform. The vertical position setting menu appears.
10. Press the “Knob” soft key to select “MEM”.
11. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position.
12. Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position.

IM 701510-01E 11-1
11.1 Storing and Recalling Displayed Waveforms

Canceling the display of the recalled waveform

13. Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the
recalled waveform. The recall waveform ON/OFF menu appears. Note
that by alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also
(dis)appears.
14. Press the “MEM” soft key to select “OFF” and the recalled waveform
will be canceled. Selecting “ON” results in displaying the recalled
waveform.

Explanation
Selecting the waveform to be stored: Source
The waveform to be stored can be selected from any displayed waveform (either input
signal waveforms or computed waveforms) at Trace 1 to 4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2/
MATH). X-Y waveforms cannot be stored.

Selecting the destination memory: Destn

The destination memory can be selected from the four internal memories “MEM #1” to
“MEM #4” (for DL1520/DL1520L, MEM #1/MEM #2). Be aware that when storing the
data, previous data will be overwritten and thus lost.

Selecting the waveform to be recalled: Source

Waveforms can be recalled from the internal memories “MEM #1” to “MEM #4” (for
DL1520/DL1520L, MEM #1/MEM #2).

Selecting the display destination for recalled waveforms: Destn

Waveforms destination can be selected from the four traces “LOAD1” to “LOAD4” (for
DL1520/DL1520L, LOAD1/LOAD2). The waveforms will be displayed at the 0div location
on the voltage axis.

Moving waveforms
You can move the position of input signal waveforms and recalled waveforms seperately.
When displaying recalled waveforms, press the POSITION key corresponding to the
recalled waveform and select which waveform (either the input signal or the recalled one)
should be moved.
When you want to move the input signal waveform, press the “Knob” soft key and select
“CH”.
When you want to move the recalled waveform, press the “Knob” soft key and select
“MEM”.

Restrictions on the recalled waveforms

It is not possible to change either the voltage axis or the time axis sensitivity of the recalled
waveforms. The conditions when the waveform was stored, are kept.
It is also not possible to perform computation and expansion on the recalled waveforms.
However, it is possible to move the recalled waveforms using the POSITION key and to
perform cursor measurements and waveform parameter measurements.

Points to note when storing and recalling

• The waveform that is stored is the P-P data displayed on the screen, not the acquisition
data.
• Waveform data located within ±5.12 div of the center of the waveform display frame is
stored. Thus, if the stored waveform exceeds this range vertically, the part exceeding the
range will not be displayed if the waveform is recalled and moved vertically.

Note
Initializing does not result in loss of stored waveforms.

11-2 IM 701510-01E
 11.2 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the STORE/RECALL key to display the data type selection
menu.
2. Press the “SETUP...” soft key to display the store/recall setting menu.
Soft keys

Storing setting parameters

3. Press the “STORE” soft key to display the setting parameters storing
menu. The default setting is “STORE”.

4. Press the “Destn” soft key to display the memory selection menu.
STORE/RECALL key
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the memory in which the setting
parameters are to be stored.

6. Press the “EXEC” soft key to execute storing.

Recalling setting parameters

3. After step 2 has been completed, press the “RECALL” soft key to
display the setting parameters recalling menu.

4. Press the “Source” soft key to display the recall memory selection
menu.
5. Press the soft key corresponding to the memory No. from which the
setting parameters are to be recalled.

6. Press the “EXEC” soft key to execute recalling.

11

the Internal Memory

Storing and Recalling Data from
Explanation
Parameters that are stored
Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob as well as the acquisition START/
STOP state and channel ON/OFF state are stored.

Selecting the destination memory: Destn

The destination memory can be selected from the four internal memories “MEM #1” to
“MEM #4”. Be aware that when storing the data, previous data will be overwritten and thus
lost. Note that the internal memory where the waveforms are stored is a different memory.

Selecting the setting parameters to be recalled: Source

Setting parameters can only be recalled from the internal memories “MEM #1” to
“MEM #4” in which setting parameters are present.

Note
Initializing does not result in loss of stored setting parameters.

IM 701510-01E 11-3
 12.1 Floppy Disks

Types of floppy Disk which can be used

The following types of 3.5-inch floppy disks can be used. Floppy disks can also be
formatted using this instrument.
2HD type : MS-DOS format, 1.2 MB or 1.44 MB
2DD type : MS-DOS format, 640 KB or 720 KB

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive

Hold the floppy disk with the label facing up and the shuttered-side facing towards the
drive, then insert it into the floppy drive. Insert it until the eject button pops up.

Removing the floppy disk from the drive

Make sure that the access indicator is not lit, then push the eject button.
Eject button

Access indicator

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

General Handling Precautions

For general handling precautions, refer to the instructions supplied with the floppy disk.

12

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

IM 701510-01E 12-1
 12.2 Formatting a Floppy Disk

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + STORE/RECALL (FILE) key to display the data
SELECT key save/load menu. “Media” menu is also provided with DL1520L with
suffix code -C4. Press the “Media” soft key to display the media
Soft keys selection menu, then select “Floppy”.
2. Press the “Utility” soft key to display the utility selection menu.

3. Press the “Format” soft key to display the format selection menu.

4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired type of format and the
STORE/RECALL(FILE) key screen prompting for verification will appear.
SHIFT key

Formatting
5. After having selected “OK” using the rotary knob, press the SELECT
key. When formatting is complete, the message “Formatting
complete” appears.

Canceling
5. After having selected “CANCEL” using the rotary knob, press the
SELECT key.

Explanation
Formatting the floppy disk
The following four MS-DOS format types are available.
2DD:640K Formats a 2DD floppy disk with 8 sectors to hold 640 KB.
2DD:720K Formats a 2DD floppy disk with 9 sectors to hold 720 KB.
2HD:1.2M Formats a 2HD floppy disk with 8 sectors to hold 1.2 MB.
2HD:1.44M Formats a 2HD floppy disk with 18 sectors to hold 1.44 MB.

Checking the format

If the floppy disk has already been formatted, select “Disk Info” after step 2 (on the
previous page) and the following information will be displayed. If the floppy disk has not
been formatted, or if it has been formatted in a format other than one of the above, the error
message “Storage media is defective” will be displayed.
• Type of disk;
• Total disk space;
• Used disk space;
• Available on disk;
• Number of Setup data files;
• Number of P-P data files;
• Number of ACQ(bin) data files;
• Number of ACQ(ascii) data files;
• Number of Image data files.

12-2 IM 701510-01E
 12.2 Formatting a Floppy Disk

Points to note concerning formatting

• The following three directories are created automatically when a floppy disk is formatted
using this instrument.
DL_WAVE Directory for “BIN” (binary) waveform data
DL_SETUP Directory for “SETUP” (setting parameters)
DL_MISC Directory for “P-P” and “ASCII” waveform data, as well as “HP-GL”,
“PS” (Postscript), “TIFF” and “BMP” screen image data
• Floppy disks formatted in a format other than those specified on the previous page cannot
be used.
• If an error message appears when formatting has been completed, the floppy disk may be
damaged.
• Formatting the floppy disk will erase all data on the disk. Be careful.

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

12

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

IM 701510-01E 12-3
 12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + STORE/RECALL (FILE) key to display the data
save/load menu. “Media” menu is also provided with DL1520L with
suffix code -C4. Press the “Media” soft key to display the media
Soft keys selection menu, then select “Floppy”.

Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function

2. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.

Saving P-P waveform data

CH key 3. Press the “P-P” soft key to display the save/load setting menu and a
POSITION key list of files.
INPUT key

STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
START/STOP key
4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.
SHIFT key
5. Press the “Source” soft key to display the source waveform setting
menu.

6. Press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be saved.

For DL1520/DL1520L, menus such as “TRACE1”, “TRACE2”,
“MATH” and “ALL” are displayed instead of the source wave setting
menu shown below.

7. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

8. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the usage
of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
9. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.

Loading P-P waveform data

10. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.
11. Press the “Destn” soft key to display the destination setting menu.

12. Press the soft key corresponding to the destination of the waveform to
be loaded.
“LOAD3” and “LOAD4” menus are not provided with DL1520/
DL1520L.

13. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

14. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

12-4 IM 701510-01E
 12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Moving loaded P-P waveforms

15. Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number
of the loaded waveform.
16. Press the “Knob” soft key to select “MEM”.
17. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position.
18. Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position.

Canceling the display of the loaded waveform

19. Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the
loaded waveform. The load ON/OFF menu appears. Note that by
alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also
(dis)appears.
20. Press the “MEM” soft key to select “OFF” and the loaded waveform
will be canceled. Selecting “ON” results in displaying the loaded
waveform.

Saving ACQ waveform data

3. Press the “ACQ...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu and
a list of files.

4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.

5. Press the “Type” soft key to display the saving format menu.

6. Select the saving format by selecting either “BIN” or “ASCII”.

7. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

8. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the usage
of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
9. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.
12
10. For DL1520L/DL1540L, if waveform data is to large to fit on the

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

floppy disk, the unit will display the message shown below when the
disk becomes full. To continue the save: Insert another formatted disk
into the drive, select “OK” with the rotary knob, and press the
SELECT key. (The save will then continue on the new disk, under
the same filename as on the previous disk.) If you want to terminate
the save instead, select “ABORT” with the knob, then press SELECT
key.

IM 701510-01E 12-5
12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Loading ACQ waveform data

Note that only BIN data can be loaded.
11. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.

12. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

13. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

For DL1520L/DL1540L, if you have saved ACQ data to multiple

floppy disks, you can opt to load all of this data or only part of it (for
example, data from one disk only). If you do a partial load, the
waveform display will not appear over the entire time axis, but only
over a portion of it. If you want to display waveforms over the full
span of the time axis, insert the floppy disk(s) with the remaining ACQ
data and repeat Steps 11 to 13 as necessary (repeating the same
filename at Step 5).

Moving loaded ACQ waveforms

14. The way to move these waveforms is exactly the same as for input
signal waveforms. For details, refer to page 5-7.

Canceling/holding the display of the loaded waveform

15. Press the INPUT key of the channel corresponding to the number of
the loaded waveform. The acquisition hold menu appears.
16. Press the “ACQ Hold” soft key to select “OFF”. Then when you
press the START/STOP key to start data acquisition, the loaded
ACQ waveform will be canceled. When you select “ON”, the loaded
ACQ waveform will not be canceled, even when you start data
acquisition. In this case, the channel display appears in the left upper
side of the screen.

17. The way to display the ACQ waveforms and cancel them is exactly the
same as for input signal waveforms. For details, refer to page 5-1.

12-6 IM 701510-01E
 12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a number (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the waveform data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a
common file name (up to five characters) before the assigned number by specifying the file
name using “FileName”.

Selecting the data format in which to save data: Data Type

The data format can be selected from the following.
P-P Converts the displayed waveform data (P-P compressed data) to binary data and
saves it.
ACQ Converts the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory to either binary or
ascii data and saves it.
BIN : Converts to binary data
ASCII : Converts to ascii data
Computed waveforms can only be saved in the P-P format.
When in single (N) mode, displayed P-P data will be saved.
Saving the waveform data (ACQ) in ASCII data format while displaying the power
spectrum (FFT), also saves the computed result of the power spectrum (FFT).

Selecting the waveform to be saved: Source

When P-P is selected as the data type, the waveform to be saved can be selected from the
following. X-Y waveforms cannot be saved.
TRACE1 to 4 One of the input signal waveforms and computed waveforms displayed as
trace Nos. 1 to 4 (for DL1520/DL1520L, 1/2/MATH) is output.
ALL TRACE All displayed waveforms are output.
When ACQ is selected as the data type, the waveforms to be saved are the input signal
waveforms displayed as trace.

About the saved data

For a description of the format of the data to be saved, refer to Appendix 5 “Output Data
Format used When Saving Waveform Data” (App-12).
Data is saved in the directory which corresponds to the data’s format type, with one of the
following extensions added. The directory is created automatically when the floppy disk is
formatted by the instrument or when data is saved.
Data format Directory name Extension
P-P DL_MISC .WVF
ACQ DL_WAVE .WVF
12
When saving data, a header file (which contains information in ASCII format necessary for

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

analysis of the saved data) is also saved. The file name used for the data is also assigned to
the header file, and a “.HDR” extension is added. The header file is saved in the same
directory as the corresponding data.

Data size
Data size will vary according to the save format, the number of waveforms (channels), the
record length, and other such factors.

For DL1520L/DL1540L, if acquisition-memory record length is long, an ACQ data save

may require more than one floppy disk. In this case you should be sure to format a sufficient
number of floppy disks before beginning the save. If you insert an unformatted disk during
the save procedure, an error message will appear and the save will abort, so that you will
have to reexecute the save from the beginning.
The “approx. 7 K” shown below denotes memory used for storage of setting data.
Values are given in bytes.
Data format Data size
P-P 4096 x CH x N + approx. 300
ACQ record length of acquisition memory x CH x N + approx. 7 K
* “N” indicates the number of trigger repetitions in single (N) mode; for any other mode, N=1.

IM 701510-01E 12-7
12.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Checking the free space on a floppy disk

Refer to page 12-3 for a description of this procedure.

Moving loaded P-P waveforms

Pressing the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded
waveform prompts you to select whether you want to move the input signal waveform or the
loaded waveform.
“CH” at the “Knob” setting selects to move input signal waveforms;
“MEM” at the “Knob” setting selects to move loaded P-P waveforms.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered. However, in case of GO/NO-GO or acquisition-on-
trigger only the first four will be valid;
• For details regarding the characters which can be used, refer to page 4-8;
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit). However, restarting the GO/NO-GO determination or acquisition-on-
trigger function will result in overwriting the old files.

Points to note when saving/loading waveform data

• Acquisition stops when saving or loading is started;
• Only waveform data located within ±5.12 div of the center of the waveform display
frame is saved. Thus, if the saved waveform exceeds this range vertically, the part
exceeding this range will not be displayed if the waveform is subsequently loaded and
scrolled vertically;
• For DL1520L/DL1540L, floppy disks having less than 20 K free capacity cannot be used
for ACQ-waveform data saves.
• When “ACQ” data is loaded, the setting parameters will change to their values at the time
of saving;
• If “P-P” data is loaded, expansion of the waveform and waveform computation are not
possible.
• If the extension of the waveform data file is changed using a personal computer, it will be
impossible to load the data.
• As for “ACQ” data, only “BIN” data will be loaded.
• For more details regarding the display of the waveform information while displaying
loaded P-P waveform or ACQ waveform data, refer to page 7-15.
• When you load waveform data (ACQ and P-P), be aware of the restrictions of some
models;
• DL1520 : Can only load waveform data saved by the DL1520.
• DL1520L : Can only load waveform data saved by the DL1520 or DL1520L.
• DL1540 : Can only load waveform data saved by the DL1520 or DL1540.
• DL1540L : Can load waveform data saved by the DL1520, DL1520L, DL1540 and
DL1540L.

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

12-8 IM 701510-01E
 12.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + STORE/RECALL (FILE) key to display the data
save/load menu. “Media” menu is also provided with DL1520L with
suffix code -C4. Press the “Media” soft key to display the media
Soft keys selection menu, then select “Floppy”.

Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function

2. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.

Saving setting parameters

3. Press the “SETUP...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu
STORE/RECALL(FILE) key and a list of files.
SHIFT key

4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.

5. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

6. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the usage
of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
7. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.

Loading setting parameters

3. Press the “SETUP...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu
and a list of files.

4. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.

5. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

12

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

6. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

IM 701510-01E 12-9
12.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a file name No. (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a common
file name (up to five characters) before the assigned file name No. by specifying the file
name using “FileName”.

Setting parameters which can be saved

Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob, as well as the START/STOP state
and the channel’s ON/OFF state are saved. If a zone waveform has been registered in GO/
NO-GO and the following settings have been made, the zone waveform will also be saved.
Mode : ON
Type : ZONE

About saved setting parameters

When setting parameters are saved, the extension “SET” is automatically added, the
“DL_SETUP” directory is created automatically, and the data is saved into this directory.

Data size
Approximately 10 K bytes are used for each set of setting parameters. However, if GO/NO-
GO zone waveforms are included, approximately 4 K bytes extra are required for each zone
waveform.

Checking the free space on a floppy disk

Refer to page 12-3 for a description of this procedure.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered.
• All the characters on the keyboard can be used. However, the following file names cannot
be used due to MS-DOS restrictions;
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit).

Points to note when saving/loading setting parameters

• Setting parameters can be saved even if acquisition is in progress (i.e. while the START
indicator is lit).
• Once the loaded setting parameters have been canceled, the original setting parameters
cannot be restored.
• If the extension of the setting parameter file is changed using a personal computer, it will
be impossible to load the data.

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

12-10 IM 701510-01E
 12.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + COPY (MENU) key to display the hard copy
SELECT key setting menu.
RESET key
ESC key 2. Press the “FILE...” soft key to display the image setting menu.
Soft keys “CENTR” menu is also provided with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix
code -C3.

Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function

3. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
COPY(MENU) key details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.
SHIFT key
Saving screen image data
4. Press the “Format” soft key to display the image data setting menu.

5. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format. In case you
selected “HPGL” or “PS”, continue with step 6. In case you selected
“TIFF” or “BMP”, continue with step 19.

6. Press the “Setup” soft key to display the output setting menu.

Selecting the paper size

7. After having selected the “Paper Size” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size. In case
Output setting menu in case "PS" is selected you selected “PS” at step 5, there is no need to use the rotary knob
and you may continue with step 18.
Selecting the pen speed
8. After having selected the “Pen Speed” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “NORMAL” or “SLOW”.
Selecting the XY Mode
9. After having selected the “XY Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
Output setting menu in case "HPGL" is
selected
press the the SELECT key to select from “DOT” or “LINE”. 12
Assigning pens

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

10. After having selected the “Pen Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “AUTO” or “MANUAL”.
In case you selected “MANUAL”, continue with step 14.
11. After having selected “AUTO”, and after having selected the “Auto
Pen” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key to display
the setting frame.
12. Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens. Press the RESET key
to return the default value.
13. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame.
Continue with step 18.
14. After having selected “MANUAL”, use the rotary knob and the
SELECT key to select the “Grid Pen” setting, the “TRACE1 Pen -
TRACE4 Pen (for DL1520/DL1520L, TRACE1/TRACE2/MATH)”
setting and the “LOAD1 Pen - LOAD4 Pen (for DL1520/DL1520L,
LOAD1/LOAD2) ” setting.
15. Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers. Press the RESET key to
return the default value.
16. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame.
17. Repeat steps 14 to 16 to set other items of the “MANUAL” setting.
18. Press the ESC key to close the setting menu.

IM 701510-01E 12-11
12.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Entering the filename

19. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.
20. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the usage
of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.

Outputting
21. Press the COPY key.

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a number (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a common
file name (up to five characters) before the assigned number by specifying the file name
using “FileName”.

Selecting the data output format: Format

The data output format can be selected from the following formats.
HP-GL Saves image data in HP-GL format.
PS Saves image data in PostScript format.
TIFF Saves image data in TIFF format.
BMP Saves image data in BMP format.

About saved image data

When saving image data, extensions are automatically added. The “DL_MISC” directory is
created automatically, and the data is saved into this directory. The extensions are as
follows.
HPGL “.HGL” TIFF “.TIF”
PS “.PS” BMP “.BMP”

Selecting the paper size

These “Setup” settings are necessary for printing out image data from a PC or such to a
plotter. The contents of printing, paper size, printing size and printing location depend on
the format of the data and can be selected from the following types. Also refer to page 10-4.
For HPGL format:
Setting Output item Output size Output location
A3-WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle
A3-SETUP Set-up parameters A3 Middle
A4-WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle
A4-SETUP Set-up parameters A4 Middle
A5-Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower SETUP Set-up parameters A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half

For PS format:
Setting Output item Output size Output location
A4-WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle
A4-SETUP Set-up parameters A4 Middle
A5-Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower SETUP Set-up parameters A5 Lower half
A5-Upper WAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower MEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half

For TIFF/BMP format:

No selections are possible; the output size is approx. 12 x 8 cm.

12-12 IM 701510-01E
 12.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Contents to be saved
In the HP-GL and PS format, the following types of screen image data are not saved.
• Snapshot waveforms
• Soft key menu and rotary knob menu
• Messages (except “Stopped” and “RUNNING)
In the TIFF and BMP format, data will be saved exactly as in case of the short copy. Refer
to page 10-4 for more details.

Data size when saving

In case of saving a V-T Waveform, with two waveforms and grid displayed:
HPGL : approx. 25 Kbyte TIFF : approx. 30 Kbyte
PS : approx. 70 Kbyte BMP : approx. 30 Kbyte

Checking the free space on a floppy disk

Refer to page 12-3 for a description of this procedure.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered;
• All the characters on the keyboard can be used. However, the following file names cannot
be used due to MS-DOS restrictions;
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit).

Points to not when using data saved in Post Script format

There is no problem printing out data saved in PostScript format on a PostScript printer.
However, if the PostScript data is used in a file created by DTP application software, the
waveform image will probably not appear on the computer’s screen. Instead a gray box
indicating the size of the image will probably appear.

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

12

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

IM 701510-01E 12-13
 12.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the SHIFT + STORE/RECALL (FILE) key to display the data
save/load menu. “Media” menu is also provided with DL1520L with
suffix code -C4. Press the “Media” soft key to display the media
Soft keys selection menu, then select “Floppy”.
2. Press the “Utility” soft key to display the utility selection menu.

3. Press the “List” soft key to display the list selection menu.

4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired list.

STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
SHIFT key

5. Use the rotary knob to select the file to protect/save.

Deleting
6. Press the “Delete” soft key.

Protecting
6. Press the “Protect” soft key. A “ ” symbol will be added before
the file name of the protected file.

Canceling protection
7. After step 4 has been performed, use the rotary knob to select the file
at the beginning of which a “ ” symbol is added.

8. Press the “Protect” soft key and the protection will be canceled. The
“ ” symbol before the file name will be deleted.

Explanation
Deleting data
Waveform data and setting parameters saved on a floppy disk can be deleted one file at a
time.

Protecting data
A protection function is used to protect saved data from being deleted by mistake. If an
attempt is made to delete protected data, an error message will be displayed and the data
will not be deleted.
A“ ” symbol is displayed before the names of protected files to distinguish them from
un-protected files.

12-14 IM 701510-01E
 12.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data

Selecting the data list: Change Data List

File lists are displayed by data type and data format and are grouped as follows.
P-P Displayed waveform data (P-P compressed);
ACQ Data being saved in the acquisition memory;
SETUP Setting parameters.

Points to note when protecting or deleting data

• Protection setting cannot be performed if the floppy disk is write-protected. An error
message will appear if an attempt is made to protect or delete files.
• It is not possible to delete more than one file at once.
• This protection setting is effective against deletion of data, but not against initialization
(formatting). Take care not to accidentally delete files by reformatting a floppy file.

CAUTION Never remove the floppy disk while the access indicator of the floppy disk
drive is lit, or damage to the magnetic head of the drive or loss of data on the
floppy disk may result.

12

Saving and Loading Data from a Flopply Disk

IM 701510-01E 12-15
 13.1 Selecting the SCSI Device

Keys and Procedure

1. Press SHIFT + STORE/RECALL(FILE) key to display the data
save/load settings menu.
2. Press the “Media” soft key to display the media selection menu.
Soft keys

3. Press the “SCSI” soft key to select the SCSI device as the media.

STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
SHIFT key

Explanation
Selecting the Media
Select from the following:
•Floppy: Floppy disk
•SCSI : SCSI device. Refer to Section 16.1 for information on the different types of
SCSI devices.

Note
When this instrument and the SCSI device are not connected properly the media selection menu does not
appear. Refer to Section 3.3.

13
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

IM 701510-01E 13-1
 13.2 Formatting the Media
Keys and Procedure
1. Following the steps described in section 13.1, select SCSI device as
Rotary knob the media.
SELECT key

Soft keys
2. Press the “Utility” soft key to display the utility selection menu.

3. Press the “Format” soft key to display the format selection menu.

Formatting
4. After having selected “OK” using the rotary knob, press SELECT
STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
SHIFT key
key. When formatting is complete, the message “Formatting
complete” appears.

Canceling
4. After having selected “CANCEL” using the rotary knob, press the
SELECT key.

13-2 IM 701510-01E
 13.2 Formatting the Media

Explanation
Checking the format
If the media has already been formatted, select “Disk Info” after step 2 (on the previous
page) and the following information will be displayed. If the media has not been formatted,
or if it has been formatted in uncorrect format, the error message “Storage media is
defective” will be displayed.
• Type of disk;
• Total disk space;
• Used disk space;
• Available on disk;
• Number of Setup data files;
• Number of P-P data files;
• Number of ACQ(bin) data files;
• Number of ACQ(ascii) data files;
• Number of Image data files.

Points to note concerning formatting

• The following three directories are created automatically when a medium is formatted
using this instrument.
DL_WAVE Directory for “BIN” (binary) waveform data
DL_SETUP Directory for “SETUP” (setting parameters)
DL_MISC Directory for “P-P” and “ASCII” waveform data, as well as “HP-GL”,
“PS” (Postscript), “TIFF” and “BMP” screen image data
• There are cases when a medium which has been formatted with another equipment such
as a PC can not be used.
• If an error message appears when formatting has been completed, the medium may be
damaged.
• Formatting the medium will erase all data on the disk. Be careful.

CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk (media) such as a MO or a
PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit. Otherwise, damage to
the SCSI device or the disk may result.

13
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

IM 701510-01E 13-3
 13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data
1. Following the steps described in section 13.1, select SCSI device as
Keys and Procedure the media.
Rotary knob Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function
2. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.
Soft keys

Saving P-P waveform data

3. Press the “P-P” soft key to display the save/load setting menu and a
list of files.

CH key 4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.
POSITION key 5. Press the “Source” soft key to display the source waveform setting
INPUT key menu.
STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
START/STOP key
SHIFT key
6. Press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be saved.

7. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

8. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the
usage of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
9. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.

Loading P-P waveform data

10. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.
11. Press the “Destn” soft key to display the destination setting menu.

12. Press the soft key corresponding to the destination of the waveform to
be loaded.

13. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

14. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

13-4 IM 701510-01E
 13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Moving loaded P-P waveforms

15. Press the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number
of the loaded waveform.
16. Press the “Knob” soft key to select “MEM”.
17. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired position.
18. Use the rotary knob to fine adjust the position.

Canceling the display of the loaded waveform

19. Press the CH key of the channel corresponding to the number of the
loaded waveform. The load ON/OFF menu appears. Note that by
alternately pressing the CH key the acquisition waveform also
(dis)appears.
20. Press the “MEM” soft key to select “OFF” and the loaded waveform
will be canceled. Selecting “ON” results in displaying the loaded
waveform.

Saving ACQ waveform data

3. Press the “ACQ...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu and
a list of files.

4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.

5. Press the “Type” soft key to display the saving format menu

6. Select the saving format by selecting either “BIN” or “ASCII”.

7. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

8. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the
usage of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
9. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.

10. For DL1540L, if waveform data is too large to fit on the medium, the
unit will display the message shown below when the disk becomes
13
full. To continue the save: Insert another formatted medium in to the
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

drive, select "OK" with the rotary knob, and press the SELECT key.
(The save will then continue on the new medium, under the same
filename as on the previous medium.) If you want to terminate the
save instead, select "ABORT" with the knob, then press SELECT
key.

IM 701510-01E 13-5
13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Loading ACQ waveform data

Note that only BIN data can be loaded.
11. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.

12. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

13. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

If you have saved ACQ data to multiple media, you can opt to load all
of this data or only part of it (for example, data from one disk only). If
you do a partial load, the waveform display will not appear over the
entire time axis, but only over a portion of it. If you want to display
waveforms over the full span of the time axis, insert the medium
(media) with the remaining ACQ data and repeat Steps 11 to 13 as
necessary (selecting the same filename at Step 12).

Moving loaded ACQ waveforms

14. The way to move these waveforms is exactly the same as for input
signal waveforms. For details, refer to page 5-7.

Canceling/holding the display of the loaded waveform

15. Press the INPUT key of the channel corresponding to the number of
the loaded waveform. The acquisition hold menu appears.
16. Press the “ACQ Hold” soft key to select “OFF”. Then when you
press the START/STOP key to start data acquisition, the loaded ACQ
waveform will be canceled. When you select “ON”, the loaded ACQ
waveform will not be canceled, even when you start data acquisition.
In this case, the channel display appears in the left upper side of the
screen.

17. The way to display the ACQ waveforms and cancel them is exactly the
same as for input signal waveforms. For details, refer to page 5-1.

13-6 IM 701510-01E
 13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a number (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the waveform data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a
common file name (up to five characters) before the assigned number by specifying the file
name using “FileName”.

Selecting the data format in which to save data: Data Type

The data format can be selected from the following.
P-P Converts the displayed waveform data (P-P compressed data) to binary data and
saves it.
ACQ Converts the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory to either binary or
ascii data and saves it.
BIN : Converts to binary data
ASCII : Converts to ascii data
Computed waveforms can only be saved in the P-P format.
When in single (N) mode, displayed P-P data will be saved.
Saving the waveform data (ACQ) in ASCII data format while displaying the power
spectrum (FFT), also saves the computed result of the power spectrum (FFT).

Selecting the waveform to be saved: Source

When P-P is selected as the data type, the waveform to be saved can be selected from the
following. X-Y waveforms cannot be saved.
TRACE1 to 4 One of the input signal waveforms and computed waveforms displayed
as trace Nos. 1 to 4 is output.
ALL TRACE All displayed waveforms are output.
When ACQ is selected as the data type, the waveforms to be saved are the input signal
waveforms displayed as trace.

About the saved data

For a description of the format of the data to be saved, refer to Appendix 5 “Output Data
Format used When Saving Waveform Data” (App-12).
Data is saved in the directory which corresponds to the data’s format type, with one of the
following extensions added. The directory is created automatically when the medium is
formatted by the instrument or when data is saved.
Data format Directory name Extension
P-P DL_MISC .WVF
ACQ DL_WAVE .WVF

When saving data, a header file (which contains information in ASCII format necessary for
analysis of the saved data) is also saved. The file name used for the data is also assigned to
the header file, and a “.HDR” extension is added. The header file is saved in the same 13
directory as the corresponding data.
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

Data size
Data size will vary according to the save format, the number of waveforms (channels), the
record length, and other such factors.
For DL1540L, if acquisition-memory record length is long, an ACQ data save may require
more than one medium. In this case you should be sure to format another medium before
beginning the save. If you insert an unformatted disk during the save procedure, an error
message will appear and the save will abort, so that you will have to reexecute the save from
the beginning.
The “approx. 7K” shown below denotes memory used for storage of setting data.
Values are given in bytes.
Data format Data size
P-P 4096 x CH x N + approx. 300
ACQ record length of acquisition memory x CH x N + approx. 7K
* “N” indicates the number of trigger repetitions in single (N) mode; for any other mode, N=1.

IM 701510-01E 13-7
13.3 Saving and Loading Waveform Data

Checking the free space on a medium

Refer to page 13-3 for a description of this procedure.

Moving loaded P-P waveforms

Pressing the POSITION key of the channel corresponding to the number of the loaded
waveform prompts you to select whether you want to move the input signal waveform or the
loaded waveform.
“CH” at the “Knob” setting selects to move input signal waveforms;
“MEM” at the “Knob” setting selects to move loaded P-P waveforms.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered. However, in case of GO/NO-GO or acquisition-on-
trigger only the first four will be valid;
• For details regarding the characters which can be used, refer to page 4-8;
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit). However, restarting the GO/NO-GO determination or acquisition-on-
trigger function will result in overwriting the old files.

Points to note when saving/loading waveform data

• Acquisition stops when saving or loading is started;
• Only waveform data located within ±5.12 div of the center of the waveform display
frame is saved. Thus, if the saved waveform exceeds this range vertically, the part
exceeding this range will not be displayed if the waveform is subsequently loaded and
scrolled vertically;
• For DL1540L, medias having less than 20K free capacity cannot be used for ACQ-
waveform data saves.
• When “ACQ” data is loaded, the setting parameters will change to their values at the time
of saving;
• If “P-P” data is loaded, expansion of the waveform and waveform computation are not
possible.
• If the extension of the waveform data file is changed using a personal computer, it will be
impossible to load the data.
• As for “ACQ” data, only “BIN” data will be loaded.
• For more details regarding the display of the waveform information while displaying
loaded P-P waveform or ACQ waveform data, refer to page 7-15.

CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk (media) such as a MO or a
PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit. Otherwise, damage to
the SCSI device or the disk may result.

13-8 IM 701510-01E
 13.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters

Keys and Procedure

1. Following the steps described in section 13.1, select SCSI device as
Rotary knob the media.

Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function

Soft keys 2. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.

Saving setting parameters

3. Press the “SETUP...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu
and a list of files.

STORE/RECALL(FILE) key
SHIFT key 4. Press the “SAVE” soft key to display the saving menu.

5. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.

6. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the
usage of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.
7. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start saving.

Loading setting parameters

8. Press the “SETUP...” soft key to display the save/load setting menu
and a list of files.

9. Press the “LOAD” soft key to display the loading menu.

10. Use the rotary knob to select the file to be loaded.

11. Press the “EXEC” soft key to start loading.

13
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

IM 701510-01E 13-9
13.4 Saving and Loading Setting Parameters

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a file name No. (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a common
file name (up to five characters) before the assigned file name No. by specifying the file
name using “FileName”.

Setting parameters which can be saved

Settings made using the soft key menu and rotary knob, as well as the START/STOP state
and the channel’s ON/OFF state are saved. If a zone waveform has been registered in GO/
NO-GO and the following settings have been made, the zone waveform will also be saved.
Mode : ON
Type : ZONE

About saved setting parameters

When setting parameters are saved, the extension “SET” is automatically added, the
“DL_SETUP” directory is created automatically, and the data is saved into this directory.

Data size
Approximately 10 K bytes are used for each set of setting parameters. However, if GO/NO-
GO zone waveforms are included, approximately 4 K bytes extra are required for each zone
waveform.

Checking the free space on a medium

Refer to page 13-3 for a description of this procedure.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered.
• All the characters on the keyboard can be used. However, the following file names cannot
be used due to MS-DOS restrictions;
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit).

Points to note when saving/loading setting parameters

• Setting parameters can be saved even if acquisition is in progress (i.e. while the START
indicator is lit).
• Once the loaded setting parameters have been canceled, the original setting parameters
cannot be restored.
• If the extension of the setting parameter file is changed using a personal computer, it will
be impossible to load the data.

CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk (media) such as a MO or a
PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit. Otherwise, damage to
the SCSI device or the disk may result.

13-10 IM 701510-01E
 13.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Keys and Procedure 1. Following the steps described in section 13.1, select SCSI device as
Rotary knob the media.
SELECT key 2. Press the “FILE...” soft key to display the image setting menu.
RESET key
ESC key
Soft keys
Turning ON/OFF the auto naming function
3. Press the “AutoFile” soft key to select “ON” or “OFF”. For more
details concerning this function, refer to the explanation later on.

Saving screen image data

4. Press the “Format” soft key to display the image data setting menu.
COPY(MENU) key
SHIFT key

5. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format. In case you
selected “HPGL” or “PS”, continue with step 6. In case you selected
“TIFF” or “BMP”, continue with step 19.

6. Press the “Setup” soft key to display the output setting menu.

Selecting the paper size

7. After having selected the “Paper Size” setting using the rotary knob,
Output setting menu in case "PS" is selected
press the the SELECT key to select the desired paper size. In case
you selected “PS” at step 5, there is no need to use the rotary knob
and you may continue with step 18.
Selecting the pen speed
8. After having selected the “Pen Speed” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “NORMAL” or “SLOW”.
Selecting the XY Mode
9. After having selected the “XY Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
Output setting menu in case "HPGL" is press the the SELECT key to select from “DOT” or “LINE”.
selected Assigning pens
10. After having selected the “Pen Mode” setting using the rotary knob,
press the the SELECT key to select from “AUTO” or “MANUAL”.
In case you selected “MANUAL”, continue with step 14.
11. After having selected “AUTO”, and after having selected the “Auto
Pen” setting using the rotary knob, press the SELECT key to display 13
the setting frame.
12. Use the rotary knob to set the number of pens. Press the RESET key
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

to return the default value.

13. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame.
Continue with step 18.
14. After having selected “MANUAL”, use the rotary knob and the
SELECT key to select the “Grid Pen” setting, the “TRACE1 Pen -
TRACE4 Pen ” setting and the “LOAD1 Pen - LOAD4 Pen”
setting.
15. Use the rotary knob to set the pen numbers. Press the RESET key to
return the default value.
16. Press the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the setting frame.
17. Repeat steps 14 to 16 to set other items of the “MANUAL” setting.
18. Press the ESC key to close the setting menu.

IM 701510-01E 13-11
13.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Entering the filename

19. Press the “FileName” soft key to display the keyboard.
20. Use the keyboard to enter the filename. For details regarding the
usage of the keyboard, refer to page 4-8.

Outputting
21. Press the COPY key.

Explanation
Auto naming function: AutoFile
If “AutoFile” has been set to “ON”, a number (3 digits, starting from “001”) will be
assigned to the data automatically when the data is saved. It is possible to insert a common
file name (up to five characters) before the assigned number by specifying the file name
using “FileName”.

Selecting the data output format: Format

The data output format can be selected from the following formats.
HP-GL Saves image data in HP-GL format.
PS Saves image data in PostScript format.
TIFF Saves image data in TIFF format.
BMP Saves image data in BMP format.

About saved image data

When saving image data, extensions are automatically added. The “DL_MISC” directory is
created automatically, and the data is saved into this directory. The extensions are as
follows.
HPGL “.HGL” TIFF “.TIF”
PS “.PS” BMP “.BMP”

Selecting the paper size

These “Setup” settings are necessary for printing out image data from a PC or such to a
plotter. The contents of printing, paper size, printing size and printing location depend on
the format of the data and can be selected from the following types. Also refer to page 10-4.
For HPGL format:
Setting Output item Output size Output location
A3-WAVE Screen hardcopy A3 Middle
A3-SETUP Set-up parameters A3 Middle
A4-WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle
A4-SETUP Set-up parameters A4 Middle
A5-Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half
A5-UpperWAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-LowerSETUP Set-up parameters A5 Lower half
A5-UpperWAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-LowerMEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half

For PS format:
Setting Output item Output size Output location
A4-WAVE Screen hardcopy A4 Middle
A4-SETUP Set-up parameters A4 Middle
A5-Upper WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-Lower WAVE Screen hardcopy A5 Lower half
A5-UpperWAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-LowerSETUP Set-up parameters A5 Lower half
A5-UpperWAVE & Screen hardcopy A5 Upper half
A5-LowerMEASURE waveform measurement data A5 Lower half

For TIFF/BMP format:

No selections are possible; the output size is approx. 12 x 8 cm.

13-12 IM 701510-01E
 13.5 Saving Screen Image Data

Contents to be saved
In the HP-GL and PS format, the following types of screen image data are not saved.
• Snapshot waveforms
• Soft key menu and rotary knob menu
• Messages (except “Stopped” and “RUNNING)
In the TIFF and BMP format, data will be saved exactly as in case of the short copy. Refer
to page 10-4 in the User’s Manual IM701510-01E for more details.

Data size when saving

In case of saving a V-T Waveform, with two waveforms and grid displayed:
HPGL : approx. 25Kbyte TIFF : approx. 30Kbyte
PS : approx. 70Kbyte BMP : approx. 30Kbyte

Checking the free space on a medium

Refer to page 13-3 for a description of this procedure.

Entering a file name

The following points must be kept in mind when entering a file name.
• A file name must always be specified;
• Up to eight characters can be entered;
• All the characters on the keyboard can be used. However, the following file names cannot
be used due to MS-DOS restrictions;
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK
• The same name cannot be assigned to different data files of the same data type.
(Overwrite inhibit).

Points to not when using data saved in Post Script format

There is no problem printing out data saved in PostScript format on a PostScript printer.
However, if the PostScript data is used in a file created by DTP application software, the
waveform image will probably not appear on the computer’s screen. Instead a gray box
indicating the size of the image will probably appear.

CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk (media) such as a MO or a
PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit. Otherwise, damage to
the SCSI device or the disk may result.

13
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

IM 701510-01E 13-13
 13.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data

Keys and Procedure 1. Following the steps described in section 13.1, select SCSI device as
the media.
Rotary knob
2. Press the “Utility” soft key to display the utility selection menu.

Soft keys
3. Press the “List” soft key to display the list selection menu.

4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired list.

STORE/RECALL(FILE) key 5. Use the rotary knob to select the file to protect/save.
SHIFT key

Deleting
6. Press the “Delete” soft key.

Protecting
6. Press the “Protect” soft key. A “ ” symbol will be added before
the file name of the protected file.

Canceling protection
7. After step 4 has been performed, use the rotary knob to select the file
at the beginning of which a “ ” symbol is added.

8. Press the “Protect” soft key and the protection will be canceled. The
“ ” symbol before the file name will be deleted.

Explanation
Deleting data
Waveform data and setting parameters saved on a medium can be deleted one file at a time.

Protecting data
A protection function is used to protect saved data from being deleted by mistake. If an
attempt is made to delete protected data, an error message will be displayed and the data
will not be deleted.
A“ ” symbol is displayed before the names of protected files to distinguish them from
un-protected files.

13-14 IM 701510-01E
 13.6 Deleting and Protecting Saved Data

Selecting the data list: Change Data List

File lists are displayed by data type and data format and are grouped as follows.
P-P Displayed waveform data (P-P compressed);
ACQ Data being saved in the acquisition memory;
SETUP Setting parameters.

Points to note when protecting or deleting data

• Protection setting cannot be performed if the medium is write-protected. An error
message will appear if an attempt is made to protect or delete files.
• It is not possible to delete more than one file at once.
• This protection setting is effective against deletion of data, but not against initialization
(formatting). Take care not to accidentally delete files by reformatting a medium file.

CAUTION Never turn OFF the SCSI device or remove the disk (media) such as a MO or a
PD while the access indicator of the SCSI device is lit. Otherwise, damage to
the SCSI device or the disk may result.

13
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Saving and Loading Data from the SCSI Device

IM 701510-01E 13-15
 14.1 Using a Trigger Output Signal (for DL1540/
DL1540L)
Trigger Output Circuit
Output level : TTL
Output logic : Negative (trailing edge)
Output delay time : 150 ns max.
Output hold time : 2 µs min. for low level, 2 µs min. for high level

Output Circuit
5V 5V

LS06
2.2 kΩ

51 Ω

Trigger Output Terminal

The TRIG OUT terminal is situated on the rear panel.
TRIG OUT
(TTL )

Output timing
A trigger is activated.

Trigger signal 150ns max

H
Trigger output
L

Hold Time for Low and High Level

A trigger is activated. A trigger is activated.
H
Trigger output
L *2
(Post-trigger time + Internal process time)
*1
Pre-trigger + *3

Internal process time

(Repeat interval for trigger output)

Trigger Trigger
Pre-trigger Post-trigger Pre-trigger Post-trigger 14
Acquisition
Other Operations

*1: Duration during which the trigger output level is HIGH

Consists of the pre-trigger time and internal process time. (2 µs or longer)
*2: Duration during which the trigger output level is LOW
Consists of the post-trigger time and internal process time. (2 µs or longer)
*3: (Repeat interval)
The minimum repeat interval for trigger output differs according to the selected mode.
Real-time sampling mode : Approx. 17 ms
Equivalent sampling mode : Approx. 10 µs
Single (N) mode : Approx. 300 µs

CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal, as damage to the
instrument may result.

IM 701510-01E 14-1
 14.2 Downloading Waveform Data to an AG Arbitrary
Waveform Generator
Keys and Procedure
Rotary knob 1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
2. Press the “To NextMenu” soft key.

Soft keys

3. Press the “DataOut...” soft key to display the download menu.

4. Press the “CH” soft key to display the channel selection menu.

MISC key

<, > keys

5. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to be
downloaded.
“3” and “4” menus are not provided with DL1520/DL1520L.

6. Set the downloading range by selecting either “T1” or “T2” soft key,
and setting the vertical cursor position using the rotary knob. You can
also use the < or > keys.

Executing the download funtion

7. Press the “EXEC” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to
“ABORT”.

Aborting the download function

8. Press the “ABORT” soft key. The name of the soft key will change to
“EXEC”.

Explanation
Download setting: Dataout...
Downloading data from this instrument should only be done after having set downloading
settings at the YOKOGAWA AG series arbitrary waveform generator. For details regarding
the settings and/or operation of the YOKOGAWA AG series, refer to its corresponding
instruction manual.
When executing downloading, the setting of this instrument will change to “talking mode”
in the case of GP-IB. When downloading is finished, or when the “ABORT” soft key is
pressed, the previous setting will return.
The range of determination is set by the two cursors T1 and T2. The setting lies within
–5.00 div at the left side to +5.00 div at the right side measured from the center of the
display.

14-2 IM 701510-01E
 14.3 Checking the System Condition

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
2. Press the “Information” soft key to display the ROM check screen.

Soft keys

3. Press any key, or move any knob on the front panel.

The setting parameter information screen will be displayed.

Returning to the MISC menu

4. Press any key, or move any knob on the front panel.

MISC key

Explanation
ROM check screen
The ROM check screen, as shown below, enables you to check the ROM version, the date
the ROM was programmed, the model type and whether options are installed. An example
for DL1540 is shown below.

Setting parameter information screen

The set-up information screen, shown below, enables you to check the most important
setting parameters.
The information given on the screen can also be printed. For a description of the procedure,
refer to page 10-3 and 10-8. An example for DL1540 is shown below.

14
Other Operations

IM 701510-01E 14-3
 14.4 Adjusting the Printer Density

Keys and Procedure

Rotary knob 1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
SELECT key
RESET key
2. Press the “Config...” soft key.
ESC key
Soft keys

3. Press the SELECT key to display the density setting frame.

4. Use the rotary knob to select the desired density level. Pressing the
RESET key results in displaying the default value.
5. Press either the SELECT key or the ESC key to close the density
setting frame.

MISC key

Explanation
Setting the printer density: Printer Density
This setting controls the printing density of hard copies on the built-in printer.
Setting range : 0 to 3
Default setting : 1
Note
When you press the soft key [Config...] on DL1540L, or DL1540 with a software (ROM) version of 1.10
or later, the setting menu for the isolator (700926) will appear as well. For details regarding the isolator
and its operation, refer to the accessory user’s manual of the isolator.

14-4 IM 701510-01E
 15.1 Troubleshooting

• For corrective actions when a message appears on the display, refer to Section 15.2
“Error Messages and Corrective Actions” (page 15-3).
• If maintenance service is required, or if the instrument still does not operate even after
the proper corrective action has been taken, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA
representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Page

Connect the instrument to a source of the correct

The source voltage is outside the rated range. 3-5
The power does not voltage.
come ON. Verify it the fuse is blown, check the cause and
Fuse is blown. 14-7
replace the fuse.

While holding down the INITIALIZE key,

Nothing is displayed. Instrument is faulty. 3-6
turn ON the power.

Display appears abnormal. Instrument is faulty. Reset the instrument to its factory settings. 4-4

The phase of the waveform

The phase shift is set. Set the phase shift to 0 div. 8-17
of CH2 is shifted.

Instrument is in remote mode. Press the LOCAL key to activate local mode. —
Keys do not function. While holding down the INITIALIZE key,
Other causes —
turn ON the power.

No trigger is caused. Trigger settings are incorrect. Make correct trigger settings for the input signal. Chapter 6

Allow instrument to warm up for at least

Insufficient warm-up time —
30 minutes after the power is turned ON.

No calibration has been performed. Perform calibration. 4-6

Measured values are abnormal. The probe has not been calibrated. Calibrate the probe. 3-8

Incorrect probe attenuation Set the correct attenuation. 5-4

Offset voltage is in use. Set the offset voltage to "0". 5-2

Waveform inversion is ON. Turn waveform inversion OFF. 5-5

No data is output to the internal

Printer head is damaged or worn out. Maintenance service is required. —
printer.

The type or format of printer do not match. Match the type and format of printer.

No data is output to the external The printer is not set to the on-line. Set to the on-line mode.
—
printer.
The printer cable is not connect properly. Connect the cable properly.

The chart paper of printer is not set. Set the chart paper to the printer.

The plotter is not set to listen-only mode. Set the plotter to listen-only mode. —

The communication interface cable is not

No data is output to the plotter. Connect the cable properly. —
properly connected.

The RS-232-C setting parameters do not match. Set the RS-232-C setting parameters correctly. —

Format the disk. The disk must be formatted

Data cannot be saved on a Floppy disk has not been formatted.
if it is a new disk.
12-2 15
floppy disk.
and Inspection
Troubleshooting, Maintenance

The floppy disk is not inserted properly. Push the disk until the eject button pops up. 12-1

Data cannot be loaded on a

The floppy disk is not inserted properly. Push the disk until the eject button pops up. 12-1
floppy disk.

The GP-IB addresses / RS-232-C parameters

Make sure that the correct addresses / parameters
Making settings and performing set in the program differ from those used by
operation control are not
are set for both program and instrument. *
the instrument.
possible via the communication
Instrument is not being used according to Use the instrument according to these specific-
interface.
its electrical and mechanical specifications. ations. *
* Refer to the Communication Interface User's Manual (IM 701510-11E).

IM 701510-01E 15-1
15.1 Troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Page

SCSI Menu not displayed The connection to DL1520L is incorrect. Connect the cable properly. 3-3

ID No. is not set to "5." Set ID No. to "5." 3-3

The order in which the power switches Turn the power ON in the following
3-6
SCSI device not recognized are turned ON is incorrect. order: SCSI device - DL1520L.

Mismatch in the media format. Format the media with the DL1520L. 13-2

Media not formatted. Format the media with the DL1520L. 13-2
Data can not be saved to
the SCSI device. Check the direction of the media,
Media is not inserted properly. -
and insert properly.

Data can not be loaded Check the direction of the media,

Media is not inserted properly. -
from the SCSI device and insert properly.

15-2 IM 701510-01E
 15.2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

Message Type
There are two types of messages which are displayed on the screen.
Status message
Displays the currently executing operation and the results.
Error/warning message
Displayed if an invalid setting has been made or if the instrument is defective.

When Maintenance Service is Required

Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this
manual.

Status Message
No. Message Reference Page
0 Calibration is in progress. 4-6
1 Auto setup is in progress. 4-2
2 Saving file is in progress. 12-4, 9, 11
3 Loading file is in progress. 12-4, 9
4 Deleting file is in progress. 12-14
5 Disk formatting is in progress. 12-2
6 A directory list is currently being created. 12-3
7 Set-up data has been stored in the internal memory. 11-3
8 Displayed waveform has been stored in the internal memory. 11-1
9 Printer output is aborted. 10-3, 10
10 GO/NO-GO is aborted. 9-5, 6, 10, 11
11 Trigger action is aborted. 6-14, 15
12 DATA output is aborted. 13-2
13 Exit from GO/NO-GO mode. 9-5, 6, 10, 11
14 Execution completed. –

Error/Warning Message
In addition to the messages given below, there are also some other error/warning messages
(code Nos. 100 to 500). These messages are described in the Communication Interface
User’s Manual (IM701510-11E).
If an error message other than those given below is displayed, the instrument may be
defective. In this case, inform your nearest YOKOGAWA representative and inform him the
number of the message which appears.
No. Message Reference Page
601 Invalid file name 4-8
602 No floppy disk inserted. 12-1
603 No SCSI —
604 Storage media is defective. 12-3
605 File not found. —
606 Floppy disk is write-protected. —
609 File name already exists. —
15
and Inspection
Troubleshooting, Maintenance

610 Reserved file name or illegal character. 4-8

611 Directory is full. No more files can be created. 12-3
612 Insufficient space for creating a file. 12-3
614 File is write-protected. 12-14
615 Formatting error. —
646-654 Storage media is defective. 12-3
656 File attribute error. —
659 It is not possible to load the file using this ROM version or this Model. —
662 It is not possible to load an ASCII type file. —
675 (For DL1520L/DL1540L)
ACQ data (BIN/ASCII) cannnot be saved since insufficient space is available (less than 20K) —
IM 701510-01E 15-3
15.2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

No. Message Reference Page

700 Specified operation is currently in progress. Execute again after the current operation has been completed. —
701 It is not possible to start acquisition since the specified operation is in progress. —
702 It is not possible to save X-Y waveform data. 12-7
703 Designated trace is not displayed. 5-1
704 No set-up data has been stored. 11-3
705 No displayed waveform has been stored. 11-1
706 It is not possible to perform a snapshot during X-Y waveform display. 4-5
707 The roll chart is not secured. 10-2
708 No roll chart. 10-2
709 Printer is overheating. Turn OFF the power immediately. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative. —
710 It is not possible to execute a self test since a storage media operation or printer operation, or GO/NO-GO —
operation, or trigger action operaton is in progress.
711 It is not possible to perform this operation since GO/NO-GO is active. Stop GO/NO-GO and try again. 9-1, 8
712 No printer installed. 2
713 It is not possible to perform this operation since the trigger action is active. Stop the trigger action and
try again. 6-14
714 It is not possible to perform the real time printout in this time range. Set time range to 500ms/div or below. 10-10
715 It is not possible to perform the real time printout during Zoom/MainZoom waveform display, X-Y
waveform display, FFT waveform display or during loading/recalling a waveform. 10-10
716 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to perform real time printout with NORM/SINGLE as the trigger mode.
(For DL1540)
It is not possible to perform the real time printout with NORM/SGL (S)/ SGL (L)/ N-SGL as the trigger
mode or with history mode.
(For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to perform the real time printout with NORM/SINGLE/ N-SGL as the trigger mode or with
history mode. 10-10
717 It is not possible to display a time stamp during acquisition. 7-9
718 It is not possible to use the ALL display during acquisition. 7-9
720 It is not possible to perform the real time printout using the external clock as timebase. 10-10
721 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to perform this action while averaging is active.
(For DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)
It is not possible to perform this action while averaging or history mode is active. —
722 CAL-OUT is not connected. —
723 Low temperature error has been detected in printer. —
724 It is not possible to execute measurement of acquisition data (All Scan EXEC) because automatic
measurement of waveform parameter is OFF, or because data acquisition is in progress. 8-9
725 (For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to perform the real time printout since the record length 1K words. 10-10
726 (For DL1520/DL1520L)
No centronics interface. 2, 10-11
728 (For DL1520/DL1520L)
Centronics printer off-line. —
730 (For DL1520/DL1520L)
Centronics interface in use. 10-11
731 (For DL1520/DL1520L)
Can’t detect printer. 10-11
800 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to set the time range during SINGLE as the trigger mode.
(For DL1540)
It is not possible to set the time range during SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode.
(For DL1520L)
It is not possible to carry out this time range setting, because the trigger mode is N-SGL, the history mode
is active or the record length is 400K/1M words.
(For DL1540L)
It is not possible to carry out this time range setting, because the trigger mode is N-SGL, the history mode 5-11, 6-13,
is active or the record length is 400K/1M/2M words. 7-10
801 It is not possible to select an external clock in Envelope mode. 5-9
802 Delay time was set to “0s” as an external clock was selected. 5-9
803 It is not possible to set a delay time since an external clock has been selected. 5-9

15-4 IM 701510-01E
 15.2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

No. Message Reference Page

804 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to set SINGLE as the trigger mode while averaging mode is active.
(For DL1540)
It is not possible to set SGL(S)/SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode while averaging mode
is active.
(For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to set SINGLE/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode while averaging mode is active. 6-13, 7-9
805 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to set averaging mode while SINGLE as the trigger mode.
(For DL1540)
It is not possible to set averaging mode while SGL(S)/SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode
is active.
(For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to set averaging mode while SINGLE/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode is active. 7-2
806 It is not possible to turn ON the smoothing function in Envelope mode. 7-3
807 It is not possible to set Envelope mode while smoothing function is turned ON. 7-2
808 It is not possible to edit a zone waveform during dual display, X-Y waveform display, FFT waveform
display or during loading/recalling a waveform. 9-6, 7
809 The operation is not possible in GO/NO-GO zone type. —
810 The trace to be edited is not currently displayed. 9-6
811 Zone data does not exist. 9-2, 7
812 It is not possible to set FFT mode in Envelope mode. 8-18
813 It is not possible to set Envelope mode in FFT mode. 7-2
814 It is not possible to set FFT mode within the repetitive sampling range. 8-18
815 It is not possible to set the repetitive sampling range in FFT mode. 7-1
816 (For DL1540)
It is not possible to set history mode in SGL(S)/SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode.
(For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to set history mode in SINGLE/N-SGL as the trigger mode. 7-9
817 (For DL1540)
It is not possible to set SGL(S)/SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode in history mode.
(For DL1520L/DL1540L)
It is not possible to set SINGLE/N-SGL as the trigger mode in history mode. 7-8
818 It is not possible to change a GP-IB address when talk-only mode is active. *
819 Set the correct date and time. 3-9
820 No keys can be operated during real time printing except the START/STOP and COPY key. 10-10
821 It is not possible to set Envelope mode during an external clock. 7-2
822 (For DL1520)
It is not possible to set SINGLE as the trigger mode in the time range.
(For DL1520L)
At this time range setting, it is not possible to set N-SGL trigger mode, the history mode or the record length
to 400K/1M words.
(For DL1540)
It is not possible to set SGL(L)/N-SGL as the trigger mode or history mode in the time range.
(For DL1540L)
At this time range setting, It is not possible to set N-SGL trigger mode, the history mode or the record length
to 400K/1M/2M words. 5-11,6-13,7-10
823 The trace to be operated is not currently loaded/recalled. —
824 It is not possible to set H-position during roll mode acquisition. 5-12
825 The operation is not possible in acquisition hold. 12-6
826 (For DL1540/DL1540L)
15
The operation is not possible while Isolator is not connected. —
and Inspection
Troubleshooting, Maintenance

827 (For DL1540/DL1540L)

The operation is not possible while Isolator is connected. —
* Refer to the Communication Interface User’s Manual (IM701510-11E).

IM 701510-01E 15-5
15.2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

No. Message Reference Page

828 (For DL1520L)
A record length of 400K/1M words can only be set when the trigger mode is SINGLE.
(For DL1540L)
A record length of 400K/1M/2M words can only be set when the trigger mode is SINGLE. 7-2
829 (For DL1520L)
A record length of 1M words can only be set when the CH2 and Math operation are both OFF.
(For DL1540L)
A record length of 2M words can only be set when the CH3 and CH4 are both OFF. 7-2
830 (For DL1520L)
Since the record length is 400K/1M words, the trigger mode can only be set to SINGLE.
(For DL1540L)
Since the record length is 400K/1M/2M words, the trigger mode can only be set to SINGLE. 6-13
831 (For DL1520L)
Since the record length is 1M words, CH2 and Math operation cannot be set ON.
(For DL1540L)
Since the record length is 2M words, CH3 and CH4 cannot be set ON. 7-2
900 The back-up lithium battery has run out. The back-up function is no longer valid. To have the battery
replaced, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual. 3-6
901 Cooling fan has stopped. Turn OFF the power immediately. —
905 Isolator cannot be used.

15-6 IM 701510-01E
 15.3 Self Test

The self test function is available in the MISC menu. This function can be used when the
instrument seems to be defective. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative and
proceed according to his instructions. Do not use this function unless the instrument is
defective.

Keys and Procedure

1. Press the MISC key to display the MISC menu.
2. Press the “To NextMenu” soft key.

Soft keys
3. Press the “Self Test...” soft key to start selftesting.

MISC key

15
and Inspection
Troubleshooting, Maintenance

IM 701510-01E 15-7
 15.4 Replacing the Power Supply Fuse

WARNING Before replacing the fuse, make sure to turn OFF the power supply and
disconnect the power source. Use ony specified fuses which should only be
obtained from your sales representative. The usage of other fuses might
cause fire.

Specifications
Item DL1540, DL1540L DL1520, DL1520L
Suffix code -1 and -5 Suffix code -1 Suffix code -5
Maximum rated voltage 250 V 250 V 250 V
Maximum rated current 3.15 A 3A 2A
Type Time lag Time lag Time lag
Approved standard VDE/SEMKO UL/CSA VDE/SEMKO
Part No. A1351EF A1436EF A1349EF

Procedure
1. Turn the power switch OFF.
2. Remove the power cord from the power supply.
3. Pull out the fuse holder by placing a screw driver under the tab and
pulling the holder forward.
4. Remove the blown fuse located at the front of the fuse holder. Note
that the other fuse is a spare one.
5. Make sure the ratings of the new fuses are correct and install them.
6. Click the holder back into its place.

Note
The fuses inside the case can not be replaced by the user. If you believe the fuse is blown, please contact
your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual. The ratings of the
fuses used inside the case are indicated below.
Location Max. rated voltage Max. rated current Type Approved standard
CRT unit(F1) 125 V 2A Time lag UL/CSA
CPU board(F131) 250 V 2A Time lag VDE/SEMKO
Rear board(F1) 250 V 800 mA Time lag VDE/SEMKO
(for DL1520L with suffix code -C4)

15-8 IM 701510-01E
 15.5 Recommended Parts for Replacement

The 3-year warranty applies only to the main unit of this instrument (starting from the day
of delivery) and doesn’t cover any other items nor expendable items (items which wear out).
In order to use the instrument over a prolonged period of time, we recommend periodic
replacement. Contact your nearest Yokogawa sales representative for replacement parts.
Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual.

Parts name Replacement interval

Built-in printer after printing 120 rolls (parts No. B9850NX) continuously

15
and Inspection
Troubleshooting, Maintenance

IM 701510-01E 15-9
 16.1 Input Section
Item Specifications
No. of input channels 4 (CH1 to CH4), 2 (CH1/CH2) for DL1520/DL1520L : analog input
Input coupling AC, DC, GND
Input connector BNC connector
Input impedance 1 MΩ ±1.5%, approx. 25 pF
Voltage axis sensitivity setting range*1 1 mV/div to 5 V/div (in multiples of 1, 2 and 5), 2 m V/div to 5 V/div for DL1520/DL1520L
Maximum input voltage 250 V(DC+ACpeak) or 177 Vrms
(when frequency is 1 kHz or lower) CAT I and II
Maximum DC offset setting range 5 V/div to 1 V/div : ±100 V
(probe attenuation 1:1) 500 mV/div to 100 mV/div : ±10 V
50 mV/div to 1 mV/div : ±1 V (50 mV/div to 2 mV/div for DL1520/DL1520L)
Vertical axis accuracy
DC accuracy *1 1 mv/div : ± (5 % of 8 div + 1 LSB)(1 mV/div is available on DL1540/DL1540L)
100 mv/div : ± (1.5 % of 8 div + 1 LSB)
others : ± (2.5 % of 8 div + 1 LSB)
Offset voltage axis accuracy *2 5 V/div to 1 V/div : ± (2.5 % of setting + 20 mV)
500 mV/div to 100 mV/div : ± (1 % of setting + 2 mV)
50 mV/div to 1 mV/div : ± (2.5 % of setting + 0.2 mV)(1 mV/div is available on DL1540/DL1540L)
Frequency characteristics *2 5 V/div to 10 mV/div Repetitive : DC to 150 MHz
(–3 dB point when sine wave of Single : DC to 80 MHz (when using CH1/2 simultaneously
amplitude ±4 div is input) measuring for DL1540/DL1540L) (CH1 only for
DL1520/DL1520L)
: DC to 40 MHz (when using 3/4 Ch. simultaneously
measuring for DL1540/DL1540L) (when using 2 Ch.
simultaneously measuring for DL1520/DL1520L.)
5 mV/div Repetitive : DC to 80 MHz
Single : DC to 80 MHz (when using CH1/2 simultaneously
measuring for DL1540/DL1540L) (CH1 only for
DL1520/DL1520L)
: DC to 40 MHz (when using 3/4 Ch. simultaneously
measuring for DL1540/DL1540L) (when using 2 Ch.
simultaneously measuring for DL1520/DL1520L)
2 mV/div, 1 mV/div : DC to 20 MHz (1 mV/div is available on DL1540/
DL1540L)
–3 dB point when AC coupling used 10 Hz or below (1 Hz or below in case the accessory 10:1 probe is being used)
Inter-channel skew 2 ns or less
(under the same conditions)
Residual noise level *3 ±0.7 mV or ±0.12 div (typical value*5), whichever greater
Inter-channel isolation –40 dB (typical value*5)
(same voltage axis sensitivity, DC to 150 MHz)
A/D converter resolution 8 bit (25 LSB/div)
Probe attenuation 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Bandwidth limit Bandwidth limit can be turned ON/OFF for 20 MHz
Maximum sampling rate real-time sampling mode
2 channels measurement : 200 MS/s (CH1 for DL1520/DL1520L, CH1/CH2 for DL1540/DL1540L)
3/4 channels measurement : 100 MS/s (when using 2 Ch. simultaneously measuring for DL1520/1DL1520L.)
repetitive sampling mode : 20 GS/s
Maximum Record length (For DL1520) (For DL1520L)
When in roll mode : 20 K (10 K*4)W/CH 1 channel measurement : 1 MW/CH(for CH1 only)
In other cases : 10 K (10 K*4)W/CH 2 channels measurement : 400 KW/CH
(For DL1540)
When trigger mode is single long mode
2 channels measurement : 120 K (100 K*4)W/CH (for CH1/CH2 only)
3/4 channels measurement: 56 K (50 K*4)W/CH
When in roll mode : 20 K (10 K*4)W/CH
In other cases : 10 K (10 K*4)W/CH
(For DL1540L) 16
2 channels measurement : 2 MW/CH (for CH1/CH2 only)
Specifications

3/4 channels measurement : 1 MW/CH

*1 Voltage axis sensitivity of 1 mV/div can be achieved by digital zooming (2 mV/div x 2).
*2 Measured with the internal clock selected as the timebase and the voltage axis sensitivity set to “CAL”, after calibration following a 30-
minute warm-up, under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16-8.
*3 Measured with the input short-circuited, record length set to 10 KW, acquisition mode set to normal mode and accumulation function OFF.
*4 Record length displayed on the screen
*5 Typical values are described in terms of typical of average performance. However, they cannot be guaranteed.

IM 701510-01E 16-1
 16.2 Trigger Section
Item Specifications
Trigger source CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4 (signal which is input to each input terminal, CH1/CH2 for DL1520/
DL1520L), LINE (commercial power source signal), EXT (signal input to the TRIG IN terminal)
Trigger type Edge trigger : Activates a trigger on the edge of a single trigger source.
Window Trigger : Activates a trigger when the source level of channel 1either enters a
previously set range of voltages or protrudes from a previously set
range of voltages.
TV Trigger : Activates a trigger for the video signal in NTSC, PAL or HDTV
(studio standard high-vision signal, available on DL1540/DL1540L)
broadcasting systems. Only CH1 is available for this function.
Designation of field No. and line No. is possible.
OR Trigger (optional) : Activates a trigger when one of the trigger source conditions becomes
true. The edge trigger condition can be selected for each trigger
source.
Pattern trigger (optional) : Activates a trigger when all the multiple trigger source conditions
become true. Trigger condition can be selected from High or Low
for each trigger source. Clock signal can also be selected.
Width trigger (optional) : Activates a trigger when the pulse width is greater or smaller than
the specified width.
Setting range below pulse width: 5 ns, 10 ns to 9.999 s
Setting range above pulse width: 30 ns to 9.999 s
*OR, PATTERN and WIDTH are provided as optional with DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L.
Trigger mode Auto : Acquires waveform automatically if no trigger is activated for more
than approx. 100 ms.
Auto-level : Automatically sets the trigger level to the median of the amplitude if
no trigger is activated for more than approx. 100 ms.
Normal : Acquires waveform only when a trigger is activated.
Single : Acquires waveform only once when a trigger is activated.
Single (N) : Acquires waveform when a trigger is activated the specified number
of times. Available on DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L.
Trigger slope Rise, fall and rise/fall
Trigger coupling DC or AC for trigger source.
HF rejection Bandwidth limit (approx. DC to 15 kHz) for the trigger source can be turned ON/OFF.
Trigger level Setting range : ±10 div from the center of the waveform display frame
Setting resolution : 1/50 div
Accuracy*1 : ±(1 div + 10% of trigger level)
Trigger sensitivity 1 divp-p
(when frequency of trigger source is DC to 150 MHz)
Trigger position 0, ±2 div, ±4 div from the center of waveform display frame
(Settable from –5 div to +5 div in steps of 1/50 div in the case of DL1520, DL1520L, DL1540 with
software (ROM) version 1.20 or later, or DL1540L with software (ROM) version 1.20 or later)
Trigger delay setting range 0 to 9.999 s (normal delay)
Inter channel trigger skew*2 5 ns or less
(when vertical sensitivity is the same)
*1 Measured with the internal clock selected as the timebase and the voltage axis sensitivity set to “CAL”, after calibration following a 30-
minute warm-up, under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16-8.
*2 Measured with a voltage axis sensitivity of 50 mV/div when a pulse of amplitude of 5 div v-p and rise time of 1 ns is input.
Trigger coupling: DC, HF rejection : OFF

16-2 IM 701510-01E
 16.3 Time Axis
Item Specifications
Time axis setting range 5 ns/div to 50 s/div
Time axis accuracy* ± (0.01 % + 500 ps)
External clock
For DL1520/DL1520L Input signal to “EXT TRIG”
Connector type : BNC
Maximum input voltage : 250 V(DC+ACpeak) or 177 Vrms, CAT I and II
(when the frequency is 1 kHz or below)
Input band : DC to 100 MHz
Fequency range of external clock : 40 Hz to 80 MHz
Input range : 2 ranges (±10 V and ±1 V)
Input level range : ±10 V range: –10 V to + 10V in steps of 40 mV
(Probe attenuation ratio 1:1) ±1 V range: –1 V to + 1 V in steps of 4 mV
Input sensitivity : 2 Vp-p (±10 V range)
(Probe attenuation ratio 1:1) 200 mVp-p (±1 V range)
Input coupling : AC/DC
HF rejection : Bandwidth limit (approx. DC to 15 kHz) for the input signal can be
turned ON/OFF.
Input impedance : Approx. 1 MW(same as section 15.1)

For DL1540/DL1540L External clock can be selected from the following two signals.
• Input signal to “EXT CLOCK IN”
Connector type : BNC
Maximum input voltage : ±6 V
Input frequency range : 40 Hz to 15 MHz (only for continuous clock)
Input level : TTL/CMOS level recommended (0.3 Vp-p or greater at the end of
the connector, ±0.15 V or greater relative to the threshold level)
Input impedance : Approx. 1 MΩ
Threshold level : 1.5 V or 0.15 V
Minimum pulse width : 25 ns or more for both High and Low levels
• Input signal to CH4
Input frequency range : 40 Hz to 40 MHz (only for continuous clock)
Input level : 2 divp-p or higher
Threshold level : Set by the trigger level (CH4)
Minimum pulse width : 5 ns or more for both High and Low levels
* Measured after 30-minute warm-up, under the standard operating conditions stipulated on page 16-8.

16.4 Display
Item Specifications
CRT Size: 7, display method: raster scan, emission color: amber, display resolution: 540 dots (horizontal)
x 432 dots (vertical)
Display area Voltage axis: 8 div Time axis: 10 div , 501 dots (horizontal) x 401 dots (vertical)
Display resolution Voltage axis: 50 dots/div (A/D converter resolution equivalent: 25 LSB/div) Time axis: 50 dots/div
(compressed)
Maximum display update interval 60 times/s
Max. No. of displayed waveforms 8 waveforms, 6 waveforms for DL1520/DL1520L

16
Specifications

IM 701510-01E 16-3
 16.5 Functions
Item Specifications
Auto set-up Makes the voltage axis, time axis, and trigger settings automatically.
Initialization Automatically resets settings to the factory settings.
Snapshot Retains the waveform displayed when the SNAP SHOT key is pressed.
Clear trace Clears snapshot and accumulated waveforms.
Calibration Automatic calibration and manual calibration are available.
Waveform display ON/OFF Display ON/OFF function is available for each of the channels CH1 to CH4.
Waveform inversion Inverts waveforms about the ground level.
Vertical position setting Moves waveforms vertically within ±4 div of the center of the waveform display frame.
Horizontal position setting Moves display positions horizontally within ±5 div of the center of the waveform display frame.
Acquisition mode Normal, envelope and averaging modes are available.
Sampling mode For some time-axis settings, the user can switch between real-time sampling and repetitive sampling.
Record length For DL1520L, 1 KW, 10 KW, 100 KW, 400 KW or 1 MW(selectable).
For DL1540L, 1 KW, 10 KW, 100 KW, 400 KW, 1 MW, or 2 MW(selectable).
For DL1520/DL1540, automatically set according to Time axis/Sample rate/Trigger mode/
Acquisition mode.
Sequential store function Stores waveforms only a specified number of times (up to 100) in case of real time sampling mode.
(available on DL1520L/DL1540/DL1540L)
History memory Stores 100 acquisition data in case of real time sampling mode (available on DL1520L/DL1540/
DL1540L).
Waveform expansion Displayed waveforms can be expanded in the time axis direction.
Display interpolation Interpolation method can be selected from straight line, sine, pulse and OFF (no interpolation).
Smoothing Displays waveforms obtained by moving averaging on sets of 5 data points.
Input filter 20 MHz
Accumulation Time for performing accumulation can be selected from 100 ms to 60 s, and INFINITE.
X-Y waveform display Two waveforms (CH1-X axis/CH2-Y axis) can be displayed simultaneously.
Graticule/Scale Allows selection of scale from frame and grid, turns display of the scale ON/OFF, turns the %
marker ON/OFF.
Intensity adjustment Intensity can be adjusted for each displayed item.
Cursor measurements Uses the vertical and horizontal cursors to measure the voltage and time at the cursor position, as
well as the difference in voltage and time between the cursor positions.
Automated measurements All 21 items of one channel, or any selected item at each channel, can be displayed. Displayble
items depend at the number of displayed waveforms. In addition to measurement of displayed data,
measurement of actual data within acquisition memory is also supported (DL1520, DL1520L,
DL1540L, or DL1540 with a software (ROM) version of 1.13 or later).
Waveform computation Performs subtraction, addition and multiplication between channels CH1 and CH2.
Phase shift Performs waveform computation with the phase of CH2 shifted.
FFT computation Displays the power spectrum after having selected the time frame from rectangular or hanning.
GO/NO-GO judgment The following two types of GO/NO-GO are available.
• Judgment is made using the zone on the screen (simultaneous judgment of four waveforms (for
DL1520/DL1520L, three) is possible).
• Judgment is made using the automatically measured waveform parameters.
Screen hardcopy and additional Outputs screen hardcopy and additional information (setup and waveform parameters) to the built-
information print-out in printer (optional) or to an external HP-GL plotter via the GP-IB interface.
Real-time printing Prints out waveforms, similar to a recorder.
Action-on-trigger Records data automatically when a trigger is activated. Selectable whether a hardcopy is printed
out on the built-in printer or whether the data will be stored to a floppy disk.
Data Storage/Recall Stores and recalls waveform data and set-ups from the internal memory and floppy disk.
DL1520L with suffix code -C4 can save/load waveform data and setting parameters from a SCSI
device. DL1540/DL1540L with software (ROM) version 1.20 or later can use a SCSI device through
the SCSI interface unit 700930 (sold separately).
Calibration signal Approx. 1 kHz / 1 V

16-4 IM 701510-01E
 16.6 Rear Panel Input/Output Section
Item Specifications
External trigger input (For DL1520/DL1520L)
(EXT TRIG IN)* Refer to “External clock” in section 15.3, “Time Axis”.
(For DL1540/DL1540L)
Connector type : BNC
Input band : DC to 15 MHz
Input impedance : Approx. 1 MΩ
Maximum input voltage : ±6 V
Trigger level : 1.5 V or 0.15 V
Input amplitude : TTL/CMOS level recommended (0.3 Vp-p or greater at the end of
the connector, ±0.15 V or greater relative to the threshold level)
Input pulse width : 25 ns or more for both High and Low levels
Trigger output Connector type : BNC
(TRIG OUT) Output level : TTL
(for DL1540/DL1540L) Output logic : Negative (trailing edge)
Output delay time : 200 ns max.
Output hold time : 20 µs min. for low level, 200 ns min. for high level
GO/NO-GO input/output Connector type : Half-pitch interface cable (DDK: DHA-RB50-S132)
(NO-GO OUT, GO OUT) Output level : TTL
(for DL1540/DL1540L) Output logic : Negative
Output : NO-GO OUT signal, GO OUT signal
Output timing : Refer to page 9-13.
* The external trigger input terminal (EXT TRIG IN) is also used as the external clock input terminal (EXT CLOCK IN). For specifications
of the external clock input, refer to page 16-3.

16
Specifications

IM 701510-01E 16-5
 16.7 Communication Interface
For details regarding the GP-IB/RS-232-C interface, refer to the “Communication Interface User’s Manual” (IM 701510-11E).
GP-IB Interface
Comes standard on DL1540/DL1540L. Provided with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -
C1, -C3, or -C4.
Item Specifications
Interface GP-IB
Electrical and mechanical Conforms to IEEE St’d 488-1978 (JIS C 1901-1987).
specifications
Interface function SH1, AH1, T5, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, C0
Protocol Conforms to IEEE St’d 488.2-1987.
Code ISO (ASCII) code
Mode Addressable mode/talk-only mode
Address setting Listener and talker addresses 0 to 30 are settable.
Remote mode clear Remote mode can be cleared by pressing the LOCAL key (except when local lock-out has been set).

RS-232-C Interface
An optional RS-232-C unit is required for DL1540/DL1540L. This interface is provided
with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -C2.
Item Specifications
Connector type Half pitch interface cable (DDK : DHA-RB50-S132)
Electrical specifications Conforms to EIA RS-232-C Standard.
Connection format point to point
Communication format full duplex
Synchronizing format Start-stop asynchronous transmission
Baud rate 75/ 150/ 300/ 600/ 1200/ 2400/ 4800/ 9600/ 19200

Centronics Interface
Provided with DL1520/DL1520L with suffix code -C3. This interface is not supported by
DL1540/DL1540L.
Item Specifications
Connector type Centronics interface connector (half-pitch 36 pin), with a printer connecting cable to D-sub socket.
Electrical specifications Conforms to Centronics specifications.
Printers which support ESC/P, LIPS, PCPR201 or PCL5

SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)

Provided with DL1520L with suffix code -C4. DL1540/DL1540L with software (ROM)
version 1.20 or later needs the SCSI interface unit 700930 (sold separately). Not provided
with DL1520.
tem Specifications
Interface standard Conforms to ANSI X3.131-1986 for SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)
Connector shape Half pitch 50 pins (Converting to the pin type is possible with the SCSI adapter accessory)
Electrical specifications Single end, refer to Section 3.3 for pin configurations.
SCSI Devices that can be Used* HD Drives : SCSI HD drives for MS-DOS ver.3.3 or later, or SCSI HD drives that can format in
EZ-SCSI.
MO Drives : 128/230/640 MB drives. MO media uses Semi IBM format.
ZIP Drives
PD Drives
* SCSI devices which can send and receive data over SCSI and which can set the ID number to "5" can be used. There are exceptions as
in the case when the media used on the SCSI device is formatted with another equipment such as a PC, or the pin configuration of the
connector is different. The specifications of each SCSI device are shown above. For more detailed information, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual.

16-6 IM 701510-01E
 16.8 Built-in Printer (optional)
Item Specifications
Printing system Thermal line dot method
Dot density 6 dots/mm
Paper width 112 mm
Real-time printout max. chart speed of 16.7 mm/s (speed drops at time axis settings slower than 500ms/div)

16.9 Built-in Floppy Disk Drive

Item Specifications
Drive size 3.5 inch
No. of drives 1
Format type 640 KB, 720 KB, 1.2 MB and 1.44 MB (MS-DOS compatible)

16
Specifications

IM 701510-01E 16-7
 16.10 General Specifications
Item Specifications
Safety standard* Complying standard :EN61010
• Overvoltage category II
• Pollution degree 2
Emission* Complying Standard : EN55011:Class A, Group1
This is a Class A product(for industrial environment). In a domestic environment, this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
• Cable conditions for DL1540/DL1540L
• External trigger/clock input terminal
Connected BNC cable(3D2W), with both side’s Ferrite Cores(TDK:ZCAT2035-0930A)
• Trigger output terminal
Same as above for the External trigger/clock input terminal
• Connecter for half pitch interface
Connected the cable B9920TA(the dedicated cable for RS-232-C Unit-700927)
• Cable conditions for DL1520/DL1520L
• Connector for RS-232-C interface (for suffix code -C2)
Connected RS-232-C shielded cable, with both side’s Ferrite Cores(TDK:ZCAT2035-0930A)
• Connector for Centronics interface (for suffix code -C3)
Connected the cable B9916TB(the dedicated cable for suffix code -C3)
• Connecter for half pitch interface (for the SCSI interface, on DL1520L with suffix code -C4)
Use a cable less than 3 m long with a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Ω. Also,
attach a ferrite core (TDK:ZCAT2035-0930A) on each end of the cable.
Immunity* Complying Standard : EN50082-2:1995
• Susceptibility under immunity condition
Noise increase : < ±15 mV
SCSI interface : No effect
• Testing Condition
100 Msps 5 mV/div PeakDetect(Envelope)Mode 20 MHzBWL, Channel Input terminated with
50 Ω.
Standard operating conditions Ambient temperature : 23 ±2 °C
Ambient humidity : 55 ±10 % RH
Power voltage and frequency fluctuation : Less than 1 % of the rated voltage/frequency
Warm-up time 30 min. or more
Storage conditions Temperature : –20 to 60 °C
Humidity : 20 to 85 % RH (no condensation allowed)
Operating conditions Temperature : 5 to 40 °C
Humidity : 20 to 85 % RH (without printer)
: 35 to 85 % RH (with printer) (No condensation allowed in either case)
Storage altitude 3000 m or below
Operating altitude 2000 m or below
Rated supply voltage DL1540, DL1540L (for suffix code -1 and -5) : 100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -1) : 100 to 120 VAC
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -5) : 200 to 240 VAC
Permitted supply voltage range DL1540, DL1540L (for suffix code -1 and -5) : 90 to 132 VAC/180 to 264 VAC
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -1) : 90 to 132 VAC
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -5) : 180 to 264 VAC
Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Permitted supply voltage frequency 48 to 63 Hz
Power Supply Fuse DL1540, DL1540L (for suffix code -1 and -5) : 250 V, 3.15 A, Time lag, VDE/SEMKO approved
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -1) : 250 V, 3 A, Time lag, UL/CSA approved
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -5) : 250 V, 2 A, Time lag, VDE/SEMKO approved
Maximum power consumption DL1540, DL1540L (for suffix code -1 and -5) : 220 VA/280 VA
(when the built-in printer is used) DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -1) : 130 VA
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -5) : 140 VA
(when the built-in printer is not used; refer to page 3-5)
* Applies to products manufactured after Jan. 1997 having the CE Mark. For all other products, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA
representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

16-8 IM 701510-01E
 16.10 General Specifications

Item Specifications
Withstand voltage 1.5 kVAC for 1 minute
(between power supply and case)
Insulation resistance 10 MΩ or more at 500 VDC
(between power supply and case)
External dimensions Approx. 215 (W) x 268 (H) x 278 (D) mm (projections excluded).
Weight DL1540 : Approx. 5 kg; DL1520, DL1520L, DL1540L : Approx. 6 kg
(without printer, only main body)
Cooling method Forced air cooling, air discharged from the rear and left side
Installation position Horizontal (one on top of another not allowed), vertical (using supports)
Battery back-up Set-up data and internal clock are backed up by a built-in lithium battery
Battery life is approx. 10 years (at ambient temperature of 23°C)
Accessories • Power cord (1)
• Printer connecting cable (1, supplied with DL1520-C3 only)
• 150 MHz probe (10:1, 1:1 selectable) (2, or 4 if two optional probes are added)
• Power supply fuse (in fuse holder) (2, including a spare one)
DL1540, DL1540L (for suffix code -1 and -5) : A1351EF
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -1) : A1436EF
DL1520, DL1520L (for suffix code -5) : A1349EF
• Roll chart (1, supplied only when the instrument is equipped with a printer)
• User’s Manual (1, this manual)
• Operation Guide (1)
• Communication Interface User’s Manual (1, option)

16
Specifications

IM 701510-01E 16-9
 16.11 External Dimensions

The drawing below shows the exammple for DL1540/DL1540L.

The external dimensions of DL1520/DL1520L are same too.
Unit : mm
Rear View

213 278
268
8

215 295

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is ±0.3mm.

16-10 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 1 Menu Map

The following menus are displayed when initialization is performed (i.e. when factory settings are restored). The
menus for DL1540 are shown below as examples.
Key Operation & First menu Key Operation & First menu
AUTO-SETUP
ACQ
Page 4-2 Page 7-1

INITIALIZE FILTER

Page 4-4 Page 7-3

CAL
ZOOM

Page 7-4
Page 4-6
V/DIV
HISTORY

Page 7-9
Page 5-6
POSITION DISPLAY FORM

DISPLAY

Page 7-11 to 7-13

DISPLAY FORM
SHIFT
Page 5-7 DISPLAY

Page 7-14 to 7-16

INPUT

CURSOR

Page 8-1, 8-4

Page 5-2, 5-4, 5-5

POSITION
MEASURE

Page 5-12 Page 8-6

FFT
TYPE
MATH
Page 6-2, 6-4, 6-5, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10
FFT
Page 8-16
SHIFT
MATH

Page 8-18

GO/NO-GO
LEVEL/
SOURCE
Page 9-1, 9-8
Page 6-2, 6-4, 6-5, 6-7, 6-8, 6-10
COPY
Stops when executing printout.
MODE
MENU
Stops when saving image screen data.
ACTION Page 6-12 Page 10-3, 10-7, 10-10, 12-12
SHIFT COPY
SHIFT
MODE
MENU
ACTION Page 6-14 Page 10-3, 10-7, 10-9, 10-10, 12-11
STORE/RECALL

COUPLING
FILE Page 11-1, 11-3
Page 6-16 SHIFT STORE/RECALL

FILE
Page 12-2, 12-4, 12-9, 12-14
MISC

POSITION/
DELAY KEYBOARD
Page 3-9, 5-8, 14-3, 14-4
Page 6-17, 6-18

Page 8-13, 14-2, 15-7

For the "Comm..." menu, refer to the Communication App
Interface Manual IM 701510-11E
HOLD OFF
Appendix

SHIFT MISC
Displays the keyboard used for entering values
Page 6-19 KEYBOARD Page 4-7

IM 701510-01E App-1
 Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis
Setting, Sample Rate and Record
Length (for DL1520/DL1540)
The record length varies according to the time axis setting as shown below.

trigger mode : auto, auto level, normal, single short

hysterisys : OFF
Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON*5 CH3, CH4 are Both OFF*6 When Envelope Mode
is Active
Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON" Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 100M[10 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
20s 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 100M[25 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
10s 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100M[50 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
5s 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 100M[100 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
2s 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 100M[250 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
1s 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 100M[500 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
500ms 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 100M[1k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
200ms 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 100M[2.5k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
100ms 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 100M[5k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
50ms 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 100M[10k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
20ms 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 100M[25k x 2] 5K x 2
10ms 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100M[50k x 2] 5K x 2
5ms 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 100M[100k x 2] 5K x 2
2ms 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 100M[250k x 2] 5K x 2
1ms 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 100M[500k x 2] 5K x 2
500µs 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 100M[1M x 2] 5K x 2
200µs 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 100M[2.5M x 2] 5K x 2
100µs 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 100M[5M x 2] 5K x 2
50µs 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 100M[10M x 2] 5K x 2
20µs 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 100M[10M x 2] 2K x 2
10µs 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K
5µs 100M 5K 200M 10K 200M 10K 200M 10K
2µs 100M 2K 500M 10K 200M 4K 500M 10K
1µs 100M 1K 1G 10K 200M 2K 1G 10K
Changes to normal mode,
500ns 100M 500 2G 10K 200M 1K 2G 10K
even when envelope mode
200ns 100M 200 5G 10K 200M 400 5G 10K has been set.
100ns 100M 100 10G 10K 200M 200 10G 10K
50ns 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K
20ns 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K
10ns 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K
5ns 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory
are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line, repetitive sampling mode is active.
*5 CH2 is ON in the case of DL1520.
*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520.

App-2 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520/DL1540)

(For DL1540)
trigger mode : single long
hysterisys : OFF
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH3, CH4 are Both At Least One of CH3,
CH3, CH4 are Both OFF
CH4 is ON OFF CH4 is ON
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 100 50K(56K) 200 100K(120K) 100M[50 x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[100 x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
20s 200 40K(56K) 500 100K(120K) 100M[100 x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[250 x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
10s 500 50K(56K) 1k 100K(120K) 100M[250 x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[500 x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
5s 1k 50K(56K) 2k 100K(120K) 100M[500 x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[1k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
2s 2k 40K(56K) 5k 100K(120K) 100M[1k x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[2.5k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
1s 5k 50K(56K) 10k 100K(120K) 100M[2.5k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[5k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
500ms 10k 50K(56K) 20k 100K(120K) 100M[5k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[10k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
200ms 20k 40K(56K) 50k 100K(120K) 100M[10k x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[25k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
100ms 50k 50K(56K) 100k 100K(120K) 100M[25k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[50k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
50ms 100k 50K(56K) 200k 100K(120K) 100M[50k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[100k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
20ms 200k 40K(56K) 500k 100K(120K) 100M[100k x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[250k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
10ms 500k 50K(56K) 1M 100K(120K) 100M[250k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[500k x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
5ms 1M 50K(56K) 2M 100K(120K) 100M[500k x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[1M x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
2ms 2M 40K(56K) 5M 100K(120K) 100M[1M x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[2.5M x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
1ms 5M 50K(56K) 10M 100K(120K) 100M[2.5M x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[5M x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
500µs 10M 50K(56K) 20M 100K(120K) 100M[5M x 2] 25K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[10M x 2] 50K x 2(60K x 2)
200µs 20M 40K(56K) 50M 100K(120K) 100M[10M x 2] 20K x 2(28K x 2) 100M[10M x 2] 20K x 2(40K x 2)
100µs 50M 50K(56K) 100M 100K(120K) 100M[10M x 2] 10K x 2(20K x 2)
50µs 100M 50K(56K) 200M 100K(120K)
20µs 100M 20K(40K) 200M 40K(80K)
10µs 100M 10K(20K) 200M 20K(40K)
Changes to normal mode,
5µs 100M 5K(10K) 200M 10K(20K) even when envelope mode
2µs 100M 2K(4K) 200M 4K(8K) has been set.
1µs 100M 1K(2K) 200M 2K(4K)
500ns 100M 500(1K) 200M 1K(2K)
200ns 100M 200(400) 200M 400(800)
100ns 100M 100(200) 200M 200(400)

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory
are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.

App
Appendix

IM 701510-01E App-3
Appendix 2 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520/DL1540)

(For DL1540)
trigger mode : single (N) or with history function ON

When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active

When Envelope Mode is
At Least One of CH3, CH3, CH4 are Both Active
CH4 is ON OFF
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 2 1K x 100 2 1K x 100 100M[1 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
20s 5 1K x 100 5 1K x 100 100M[2.5 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
10s 10 1K x 100 10 1K x 100 100M[5 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
5s 20 1K x 100 20 1K x 100 100M[10 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
2s 50 1K x 100 50 1K x 100 100M[25 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
1s 100 1K x 100 100 1K x 100 100M[50 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
500ms 200 1K x 100 200 1K x 100 100M[100 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
200ms 500 1K x 100 500 1K x 100 100M[250 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
100ms 1k 1K x 100 1k 1K x 100 100M[500 x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
50ms 2k 1K x 100 2k 1K x 100 100M[1k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
20ms 5k 1K x 100 5k 1K x 100 100M[2.5k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
10ms 10k 1K x 100 10k 1K x 100 100M[5k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
5ms 20k 1K x 100 20k 1K x 100 100M[10k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
2ms 50k 1K x 100 50k 1K x 100 100M[25k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
1ms 100k 1K x 100 100k 1K x 100 100M[50k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
500µs 200k 1K x 100 200k 1K x 100 100M[100k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
200µs 500k 1K x 100 500k 1K x 100 100M[250k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
100µs 1M 1K x 100 1M 1K x 100 100M[500k x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
50µs 2M 1K x 100 2M 1K x 100 100M[1M x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
20µs 5M 1K x 100 5M 1K x 100 100M[2.5M x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
10µs 10M 1K x 100 10M 1K x 100 100M[5M x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
5µs 20M 1K x 100 20M 1K x 100 100M[10M x 2] 500 x 2 x 100
2µs 50M 1K x 100 50M 1K x 100 100M[10M x 2] 200 x 2 x 100
1µs 100M 1K x 100 100M 1K x 100
Changes to normal mode,
500ns 100M 500 x 100 200M 1K x 100
even when envelope mode
200ns 100M 200 x 100 200M 400 x 100 has been set.
100ns 100M 100 x 100 200M 200 x 100

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored
in the acquisition memory are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having
been sampled at 100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 The displayed record length x100 shows the number of repeated waveform acquisition out of 100 in the
single (N) mode or hysterisys function.

App-4 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis
Setting, Sample Rate and Record
Length (for DL1520L/DL1540L)

Displayed record length varies according to the time-axis setting, as omdicated below.

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 1KW

Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
When Envelope Mode
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON *5 CH3, CH4 are Both OFF *6 is Active
Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON" Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 2 1K(2K) 2 1K(2K) 2 1K(2K) 2 1K(2K) 100M[1 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
20s 5 1K(2K) 5 1K(2K) 5 1K(2K) 5 1K(2K) 100M[2.5 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
10s 10 1K(2K) 10 1K(2K) 10 1K(2K) 10 1K(2K) 100M[5 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
Roll mode display

5s 20 1K(2K) 20 1K(2K) 20 1K(2K) 20 1K(2K) 100M[10 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)

2s 50 1K(2K) 50 1K(2K) 50 1K(2K) 50 1K(2K) 100M[25 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
1s 100 1K(2K) 100 1K(2K) 100 1K(2K) 100 1K(2K) 100M[50 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
500ms 200 1K(2K) 200 1K(2K) 200 1K(2K) 200 1K(2K) 100M[100 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
200ms 500 1K(2K) 500 1K(2K) 500 1K(2K) 500 1K(2K) 100M[250 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
100ms 1k 1K(2K) 1k 1K(2K) 1k 1K(2K) 1k 1K(2K) 100M[500 x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
50ms 2k 1K(2K) 2k 1K(2K) 2k 1K(2K) 2k 1K(2K) 100M[1k x 2] 500 x 2(1K x 2)
20ms 5k 1K 5k 1K 5k 1K 5k 1K 100M[2.5k x 2] 500 x 2
10ms 10k 1K 10k 1K 10k 1K 10k 1K 100M[5k x 2] 500 x 2
5ms 20k 1K 20k 1K 20k 1K 20k 1K 100M[10k x 2] 500 x 2
2ms 50k 1K 50k 1K 50k 1K 50k 1K 100M[25k x 2] 500 x 2
1ms 100k 1K 100k 1K 100k 1K 100k 1K 100M[50k x 2] 500 x 2
500 s 200k 1K 200k 1K 200k 1K 200k 1K 100M[100k x 2] 500 x 2
200 s 500k 1K 500k 1K 500k 1K 500k 1K 100M[250k x 2] 500 x 2
100 s 1M 1K 1M 1K 1M 1K 1M 1K 100M[500k x 2] 500 x 2
50 s 2M 1K 2M 1K 2M 1K 2M 1K 100M[1M x 2] 500 x 2
20 s 5M 1K 5M 1K 5M 1K 5M 1K 100M[2.5M x 2] 500 x 2
10 s 10M 1K 10M 1K 10M 1K 10M 1K 100M[5M x 2] 500 x 2
5s 20M 1K 20M 1K 20M 1K 20M 1K 100M[10M x 2] 500 x 2
2s 50M 1K 50M 1K 50M 1K 50M 1K 100M[10M x 2] 200 x 2
1s 100M 1K 100M 1K 100M 1K 100M 1K
500ns 100M 500 200M 1K 200M 1K 200M 1K
200ns 100M 200 500M 1K 200M 400 500M 1K Changes to normal mode,
100ns 100M even when envelope mode
100 1G 1K 200M 200 1G 1K
has been set.
50ns 2G 1K 2G 1K 2G 1K 2G 1K
20ns 5G 1K 5G 1K 5G 1K 5G 1K
10ns 10G 1K 10G 1K 10G 1K 10G 1K
5ns 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory
are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line, repetitive sampling mode is active. App
*5 CH2 is ON in the case of DL1520L.
Appendix

*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520L.

IM 701510-01E App-5
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520L/DL1540L)

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 10KW

Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON *5 CH3, CH4 are Both OFF *6 When Envelope Mode
is Active
Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON" Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 20 10K(20K) 100M[10 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
20s 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 50 10K(20K) 100M[25 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
10s 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100 10K(20K) 100M[50 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
Roll mode display

5s 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 200 10K(20K) 100M[100 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
2s 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 500 10K(20K) 100M[250 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
1s 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 1k 10K(20K) 100M[500 x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
500ms 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 2k 10K(20K) 100M[1k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
200ms 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 5k 10K(20K) 100M[2.5k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
100ms 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 10k 10K(20K) 100M[5k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
50ms 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 20k 10K(20K) 100M[10k x 2] 5K x 2(10K x 2)
20ms 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 50k 10K 100M[25k x 2] 5K x 2
10ms 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100k 10K 100M[50k x 2] 5K x 2
5ms 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 200k 10K 100M[100k x 2] 5K x 2
2ms 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 500k 10K 100M[250k x 2] 5K x 2
1ms 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 1M 10K 100M[500k x 2] 5K x 2
500µs 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 2M 10K 100M[1M x 2] 5K x 2
200µs 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 5M 10K 100M[2.5M x 2] 5K x 2
100µs 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 10M 10K 100M[5M x 2] 5K x 2
50µs 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 20M 10K 100M[10M x 2] 5K x 2
20µs 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 50M 10K 100M[10M x 2] 2K x 2
10µs 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K 100M 10K
5µs 100M 5K 200M 10K 200M 10K 200M 10K
2µs 100M 2K 500M 10K 200M 4K 500M 10K
1µs 100M 1K 1G 10K 200M 2K 1G 10K
Changes to normal mode,
500ns 100M 500 2G 10K 200M 1K 2G 10K
even when envelope mode
200ns 100M 200 5G 10K 200M 400 5G 10K has been set.
100ns 100M 100 10G 10K 200M 200 10G 10K
50ns 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K
20ns 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K
10ns 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K
5ns 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory
are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line, repetitive sampling mode is active.
*5 CH2 is ON in the case of DL1520L..
*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520L.

App-6 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520LDL1540L)

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 100KW

Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON *5 When Envelope Mode
CH3, CH4 are Both OFF *6 is Active
Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON" Rep: "OFF" Rep: "ON"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 200 100K(200K) 200 100K(200K) 200 100K(200K) 200 100K(200K) 100M[100 x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
20s 500 100K(200K) 500 100K(200K) 500 100K(200K) 500 100K(200K) 100M[250 x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
10s 1k 100K(200K) 1k 100K(200K) 1k 100K(200K) 1k 100K(200K) 100M[500 x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
Roll mode display

5s 2k 100K(200K) 2k 100K(200K) 2k 100K(200K) 2k 100K(200K) 100M[1k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)

2s 5k 100K(200K) 5k 100K(200K) 5k 100K(200K) 5k 100K(200K) 100M[2.5k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
1s 10k 100K(200K) 10k 100K(200K) 10k 100K(200K) 10k 100K(200K) 100M[5k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
500ms 20k 100K(200K) 20k 100K(200K) 20k 100K(200K) 20k 100K(200K) 100M[10k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
200ms 50k 100K(200K) 50k 100K(200K) 50k 100K(200K) 50k 100K(200K) 100M[25k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
100ms 100k 100K(200K) 100k 100K(200K) 100k 100K(200K) 100k 100K(200K) 100M[50k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
50ms 200k 100K(200K) 200k 100K(200K) 200k 100K(200K) 200k 100K(200K) 100M[100k x 2] 50K x 2(100K x 2)
20ms 500k 100K 500k 100K 500k 100K 500k 100K 100M[250k x 2] 50K x 2
10ms 1M 100K 1M 100K 1M 100K 1M 100K 100M[500k x 2] 50K x 2
5ms 2M 100K 2M 100K 2M 100K 2M 100K 100M[1M x 2] 50K x 2
2ms 5M 100K 5M 100K 5M 100K 5M 100K 100M[2.5M x 2] 50K x 2
1ms 10M 100K 10M 100K 10M 100K 10M 100K 100M[5M x 2] 50K x 2
500µs 20M 100K 20M 100K 20M 100K 20M 100K 100M[10M x 2] 50K x 2
200µs 50M 100K 50M 100K 50M 100K 50M 100K 100M[10M x 2] 20K x 2
100µs 100M 100K 100M 100K 100M 100K 100M 100K
50µs 100M 50K 100M 50K 200M 100K 200M 50K
20µs 100M 20K 100M 20K 200M 40K 200M 20K
10µs 100M 10K 100M 10K 200M 20K 200M 10K
5µs 100M 5K 200M 10K 200M 10K 200M 10K
2µs 100M 2K 500M 10K 200M 4K 500M 10K Changes to normal mode,
even when envelope mode
1µs 100M 1K 1G 10K 200M 2K 1G 10K
has been set.
500ns 100M 500 2G 10K 200M 1K 2G 10K
200ns 100M 200 5G 10K 200M 400 5G 10K
100ns 100M 100 10G 10K 200M 200 10G 10K
50ns 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K 20G 10K
20ns 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K 20G 4K
10ns 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K 20G 2K
5ns 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K 20G 1K

*1 The displayed record length given in ( ) refers to the record length stored in the acquisition memory.
Only when the trigger mode is auto or auto level, data of a record length given in ( ) is stored.
In case where no value in ( ) is given, the displayed record length and the record length stored in the acquisition memory
are the same.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 For the setting enclosed by the bold line, repetitive sampling mode is active.
*5 CH2 is ON in the case of DL1520L.
*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520L.

App
Appendix

IM 701510-01E App-7
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520L/DL1540L)

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 400KW

(Selection of 400KW length is not available if T/div is set
between 50ns and 5ns, or if trigger mode is other than "single.")
Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON *5 CH3, CH4 are Both OFF *6 When Envelope Mode
is Active
Rep: "ON" or "OFF" Rep: "ON" or "OFF"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 1k 400K(8div) 1k 400K(8div) 100M[500 x 2] 200K x 2
20s 2k 400K 2k 400K 100M[1k x 2] 200K x 2
Roll mode display

10s 5k 400K(8div) 5k 400K(8div) 100M[2.5k x 2] 200K x 2

5s 10k 400K(8div) 10k 400K(8div) 100M[5k x 2] 200K x 2
2s 20k 400K 20k 400K 100M[10k x 2] 200K x 2
1s 50k 400K(8div) 50k 400K(8div) 100M[25k x 2] 200K x 2
500ms 100k 400K(8div) 100k 400K(8div) 100M[50k x 2] 200K x 2
200ms 200k 400K 200k 400K 100M[100k x 2] 200K x 2
100ms 500k 400K(8div) 500k 400K(8div) 100M[250k x 2] 200K x 2
50ms 1M 400K(8div) 1M 400K(8div) 100M[500k x 2] 200K x 2
20ms 2M 400K 2M 400K 100M[1M x 2] 200K x 2
10ms 5M 400K(8div) 5M 400K(8div) 100M[2.5M x 2] 200K x 2
5ms 10M 400K(8div) 10M 400K(8div) 100M[5M x 2] 200K x 2
2ms 20M 400K 20M 400K 100M[10M x 2] 200K x 2
1ms 50M 400K(8div) 50M 400K(8div) 100M[10M x 2] 80K x 2(8div)
500µs 100M 400K(8div) 100M 400K(8div)
200µs 100M 200K 200M 400K
100µs 100M 100K 200M 200K
50µs 100M 50K 200M 100K
20µs 100M 20K 200M 40K Changes to normal mode,
even when envelope mode
10µs 100M 10K 200M 20K
has been set.
5µs 100M 5K 200M 10K
2µs 100M 2K 200M 4K
1µs 100M 1K 200M 2K
500ns 100M 500 200M 1K
200ns 100M 200 200M 400
100ns 100M 100 200M 200

*1 The "(8div)" indication shown in the "Displayed record length" column indicates that the waveform display spans only 8
divisions of the screen's time axis. (No waveform appears over the two far-right divisions.) The displayed record length and
acquisition-memory record length are equivalent.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 Regardless of the "Rep" setting, repetitive sampling is not used with 400KW maximum displayable record length.
(A "Rep" setting of "ON" is ineffective.)
*5 CH2 is ON in the case of DL1520L.
*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520L.

App-8 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520L/DL1540L)

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 1MW

(Selection of 1MW length is not available if T/div is set
between 50ns and 5ns, or if trigger mode is other than "single.")
Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON *5 *6 When Envelope Mode
CH3, CH4 are Both OFF is Active
Rep: "ON" or "OFF" Rep: "ON" or "OFF"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 2k 1M 2k 1M 100M[1k x 2] 500K x 2
Roll mode display

20s 5k 1M 5k 1M 100M[2.5k x 2] 500K x 2

10s 10k 1M 10k 1M 100M[5k x 2] 500K x 2
5s 20k 1M 20k 1M 100M[10k x 2] 500K x 2
2s 50k 1M 50k 1M 100M[25k x 2] 500K x 2
1s 100k 1M 100k 1M 100M[50k x 2] 500K x 2
500ms 200k 1M 200k 1M 100M[100k x 2] 500K x 2
200ms 500k 1M 500k 1M 100M[250k x 2] 500K x 2
100ms 1M 1M 1M 1M 100M[500k x 2] 500K x 2
50ms 2M 1M 2M 1M 100M[1M x 2] 500K x 2
20ms 5M 1M 5M 1M 100M[2.5M x 2] 500K x 2
10ms 10M 1M 10M 1M 100M[5M x 2] 500K x 2
5ms 20M 1M 20M 1M 100M[10M x 2] 500K x 2
2ms 50M 1M 50M 1M 100M[10M x 2] 200K x 2
1ms 100M 1M 100M 1M
500µs 100M 500K 200M 1M
200µs 100M 200K 200M 400K
100µs 100M 100K 200M 200K
50µs 100M 50K 200M 100K
20µs 100M 20K 200M 40K Changes to normal mode,
even when envelope mode
10µs 100M 10K 200M 20K has been set.
5µs 100M 5K 200M 10K
2µs 100M 2K 200M 4K
1µs 100M 1K 200M 2K
500ns 100M 500 200M 1K
200ns 100M 200 200M 400
100ns 100M 100 200M 200

*1 The displayed record length and acquisition-memory record length are equivalent.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 Regardless of the "Rep" setting, repetitive sampling is not used with 1MW maximum displayable record length.
(A "Rep" setting of "ON" is ineffective.)
*5 This column is inapplicable on DL1520L.
*6 CH2 is OFF in the case of DL1520L.

App
Appendix

IM 701510-01E App-9
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Sample Rate and Record Length (for DL1520L/DL1540L)

When "Maximum Displayable Record Length" is set to 2MW (for DL1540L only)
(Selection of 2MW length is not available if T/div is set between
50ns and 5ns, if trigger mode is other than "single," or if CH3 or CH4 is ON.)
Rep: Repetitive sampling mode
When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active
At Least One of CH3, CH4 is ON CH3, CH4 are Both OFF When Envelope Mode
is Active
Rep: "ON" or "OFF" Rep: "ON" or "OFF"
Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed
rate record length rate record length rate record length
T/div (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word) (S/s) (word)
50s 5k(8div) 2M 100M[2.5k x 2] 1M x 2
Roll mode display

20s 10k 2M 100M[5k x 2] 1M x 2

10s 20k 2M 100M[10k x 2] 1M x 2
5s 50k(8div) 2M 100M[25k x 2] 1M x 2
2s 100k 2M 100M[50k x 2] 1M x 2
1s 200k 2M 100M[100k x 2] 1M x 2
500ms 500k(8div) 2M 100M[250k x 2] 1M x 2
200ms 1M 2M 100M[500k x 2] 1M x 2
100ms 2M 2M 100M[1M x 2] 1M x 2
50ms 5M(8div) 2M 100M[2.5M x 2] 1M x 2
It is not possible to turn ON CH3 or
20ms 10M 2M 100M[5M x 2] 1M x 2
CH4 if the maximum display record
10ms length (2MW) is selected. 20M 2M 100M[10M x 2] 1M x 2
5ms 50M(8div) 2M 100M[10M x 2] 400K x 2(8div)
2ms 100M 2M
1ms 200M 2M
500µs 200M 1M
200µs 200M 400K
100µs 200M 200K
50µs 200M 100K Changes to normal mode,
even when envelope mode
20µs 200M 40K has been set.
10µs 200M 20K
5µs 200M 10K
2µs 200M 4K
1µs 200M 2K
500ns 200M 1K
200ns 200M 400
100ns 200M 200

*1 The displayed record length and acquisition-memory record length are equivalent.
*2 The sample rate given in ( ) for the envelope mode is the rate at which data are acquired after having been sampled at
100MS/s and having taken the minimum and maximum values.
*3 In the envelope mode, the minimum / maximum values are displayed in a pair.
*4 Regardless of the "Rep" setting, repetitive sampling is not used with 2MW maximum displayable record length.
(A "Rep" setting of "ON" is ineffective.)

App-10 IM 701510-01E
 ;;;
;;;
Appendix 4 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform

“Integ1TY”
Total area for positive side only: S1+S2
S2
S1

“Integ2TY”
Total area for both positive and negative sides: S1+S3–S2

;;;;
S3
S1
S2

“Integ1XY”
(1) Multiplc loops (2) Non-closed curve

Area S= n×S0 Area S= S0

n: Number of loops Area enclosed by
S0 S0 a curve connecting
the start and stop
Start point points
Start point, Stop point
Stop point Waveform

(3) Loop tracing the shape of "8" (4) Spiral loop

Area S= | S0– S1 | S1 Area S= S0×2+S1

S1 Number of overlaps
S0 varies according to
Start the number of loops.
S0 point
Start point
Stop point Stop point

“Integ2XY”

(1) When only one Y data corresponds to X data

1 3

; ;;
X axis (Y=0)

Start point Stop point Area S= –S0

S0

Area S=S0
S0 Stop point
Start point

X axis (Y=0)
2 4 X axis (Y=0)
Start point Area S=S0
Stop point S0

Area S= –S0
S0 Start point
Stop point

X axis (Y=0)

(2) When the waveform extends into the negative side

Start point

S0
X axis (Y=0)
S1
Area S=S0–S1
Stop point

(2) When two or more Y data correspond to X data

S0
Start point Start point Stop
Area S=S0
S0 point App
S1
Area S=S0+2×S1+S2
Appendix

Stop point S2
X axis (Y=0) X axis (Y=0)

IM 701510-01E App-11
 Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving
Waveform Data (Example DL1540L)
Header Files (Files with the identifier of “.HDR”)
The header file is always saved with the data, irrespective of the data type. The header file
contains information in ASCII format used when saved waveforms are recalled for analysis.
The same header file is used by all YOKOGAWA measuring instruments, so it may contain
some data which is not necessary for this instrument.
Only a brief description is given in this section. Detailed technical information on the
header file is available from YOKOGAWA.
If you need this information, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative.

//YOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT

$PublicInfo : Common information label
FormatVersion 1.01 : Version No. of header file format
Model 1540L : Model name
Endian Big : Endian mode (Big/Ltl)*1 for storage
DataFormat Trace : Storage format (Trace/Block) of binary file waveform data *2
GroupNumber 1 : Number of groups for display
TraceTotalNumber 1 : Total number of selected waveforms
DataOffset 0 : Start position of waveform data

$Group1 : Group No. of displayed waveforms

TraceNumber 1 : Number of waveforms in the group
BlockNumber 3 : Maximum number of blocks in the group *3
TraceName Ch2 : Waveform No.
BlockSize 10024 : Data size of each block of waveform
VResolution 3.05176e-03 : Resolution co-efficient of Y axis conversion equation for each
waveform *4
VOffset 0.00000e+00 : Offset co-efficient of Y axis conversion equation for each
waveform*4
VDataType IS2 : Type of waveform data of each waveform *5
VUnit V : Units used for Y axis of each waveform (no effect on data)
VPlusOverData ? : Upper limit of error data
VMinusOverData ? : Lower limit of error data
VIllegalData -32768 : If any stored value in the binary data of any waveform matches this
value, the data is illegal.
VMaxData 32736 : Maximum value of binary data for each waveform
VMinData -32736 : Minimum value of binary data for each waveform
HResolution 1.00000e-06 : Resolution co-efficient of X axis conversion equation for each
waveform *6
HOffset 1.00000e-03 : Offset co-efficient of X axis conversion equation for each
waveform*6
HUnit s : Units used for X axis for each waveform (no effect on data)
Date 95/12/01 : The date when the trigger was activated
Time 01:18:54 : Time when the trigger was activated

$PrivateInfo : Information particular to model

ModelVersion 1.01 : Version No. of the model
MathBlockNo. ? : Block No. of block to be computed
FormMath1 ? : Contents of Math1
DisplayPointNo. 9 : Display start point (the position from the beginning of the block)
TriggerPointNo. 300 : Trigger point (the position from the measurement start point)
PhaseShift 100 : Phase shift (number of data points)

(The following data is applicable to the DL1540L only.)

$MediaInfo
MediaNo. 1 : Sequential number of divided save
MGroupNumber 1 : Number of groups in this medium.
MTraceTotalNumber 1 : Number of waveforms in this medium

App-12 IM 701510-01E
 Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data (Example DL1540L)

$MGroup1
MTraceNumber 1 : Number of waveforms in this group
MBlockNumber 3 : Number of blocks in this group
MTraceName Ch2 : Waveform ID within group
StartBlockNo. 1 : First block of saved data in group
StartPointNo. 1 : Data start point in first block
EndBlockNo. 3 : Last block of saved data in group
EndPointNo. 10024 : Data end point in last block of group
*1 : Endian mode for storage (becomes "Big" on DL1500 series)
Big : Data for Motorola 68000 series.
Ltl : Data for Intel 86 series.
*2 : Binary file storage format (becomes "Trace" on DL1500 series)
Trace : Groups into blocks, each block for a single waveform.
Block : Groups into blocks, each block for data sampled at the same time.
*3 : Maximum number of blocks per group (or repetitions in the case of single (N) trigger
mode)
Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies from waveform to
waveform.
*4 : Y axis conversion equation for each waveform
Y axis value = VResolution x Raw data + VOffset
*5 : Data type
ISn: n-byte signed integer ¨ “BIN”, “P-P”
FS10 : 10-byte signed real number ¨ “FLOAT”
*6 : X axis conversion equation for each waveform
X axis value = HResolution ¥ (Data No. - 1) + HOffset

Binary Data
The data and file structures vary according to the type of data to be saved.

Data structure
Data other than averaging data

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0

Code

Averaging data

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Code

File structure
• BIN

BIN (waveform data)

App
Appendix

Control information

IM 701510-01E App-13
Appendix 5 Output Data Format used when Saving Waveform Data (Example DL1540L)

• P-P DATA

P-P (waveform data)

Control information

ASCII Data
ASCII data consists of a mantissa part and an exponent part as shown below.

“Model”, “DL1540L”
“BlockSize”, 512
“BlockNumber”, 1
“DisplayPointNo.”, 6
“DisplayBlockSize”, 500
“TriggerPointNo.”, 250
“Date”, “95/12/01”
“Time”, “18:17:11”
“SampleRate”, 100,”MHz”
“TraceName”, “Ch1”,”Ch2",”Ch3",”Ch4"
“Unit”, “V”,”V”,”V”,”V”

“MediaNo.”, 1
“StartBlockNo.”, 1
“StartPointNo.”, 1
“EndBlockNo.”, 1
“EndPointNo.”, 512

-4.200e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.400e+01, -2.000e+00

-4.200e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.400e+01, -2.000e+00
-4.200e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.200e+01, -2.000e+00
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
3.800e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.200e+01, -2.000e+00
3.800e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.400e+01, -2.000e+00
3.800e+01, -2.000e+00, 2.400e+01, -2.000e+00

App-14 IM 701510-01E
 Index

% marker ...................................................................... 1-17, 7-14 date/time setting ....................................................................... 3-9

DC ........................................................................................... 1-2
A Page DC coupling ............................................................................. 5-2
default settings ......................................................................... 4-4
AC ........................................................................................... 1-2 delay
AC coupling ............................................................................. 5-2 measurement ..................................................................... 8-9
accessories .................................................................................... 3 setup ................................................................................ 8-12
accumulated waveform ............................................... 1-16, 7-12 time .................................................................................. 6-18
acquisition deleting ......................................................................... 12-4, 13-4
count .................................................................................. 7-8 density ..................................................................................... 14-4
modes ...................................................................... 1-12, 7-1 determination
setting .............................................................................. 1-12 logic ............................................................................ 9-4, 9-9
starting/stopping .............................................................. 4-1 range ......................................................................... 9-8, 9-11
action-on trigger .................................................................... 6-14 zone ................................................................................... 9-3
AG series ................................................................................ 14-2 displays ..................................................................................... 2-5
AT-LVL ................................................................................... 6-12 display
attenuation ................................................................................ 5-4 interpolation ................................................................... 1-14
auto set-up ...................................................................... 1-20, 4-2 mode ................................................................................ 5-10
auto-level mode ..................................................................... 1-10 number ............................................................................ 1-14
auto-mode ..................................................................... 1-10, 6-12 sensitivity ........................................................................ 8-16
automated measurements ...................................................... 1-18 distal value ............................................................................... 8-8
averaging mode .............................................................. 1-12, 7-1 downloading ........................................................................... 14-2

B Page E Page

bandwidth limit .............................................................. 1-13, 7-3 entering

base trace .................................................................................. 9-6 characters .......................................................................... 4-8
block diagram ........................................................................... 1-1 values ................................................................................ 4-7
broadcasting system ................................................................ 6-5 envelope mode ............................................................... 1-12, 7-1
erasing a waveform ................................................................. 4-5
error messages ........................................................................ 15-3
C Page expanded waveform ....................................................... 1-13, 7-4
expansion rate .......................................................................... 7-4
CAL ........................................................................................... 5-6 EXT CH4 .................................................................................. 5-8
calibration EXT IN ..................................................................................... 5-8
performing ........................................................................ 4-6 external clock ........................................................................... 5-9
signal ................................................................................. 3-8 external plotter ............................................................. 10-7, 10-8
chart
loading ............................................................................ 10-1
specs ................................................................................ 10-1 F Page
speed ................................................................................ 10-6
clear trace ....................................................................... 1-20, 4-5 FD(ACQ) ........................................................................ 6-14, 9-4
cleaning ..................................................................................... 3-1 FD(P-P) ........................................................................... 6-14, 9-4
ClkCH ....................................................................................... 6-9 FFT ....................................................................... 1-19, 7-5, 8-18
clock channel ........................................................................... 6-9 field ........................................................................................... 6-5
comment filter ........................................................................................... 7-3
displaying ..................................................................... 10-10 floppy disk .............................................................................. 12-1
entering ......................................................................... 10-10 formatting floppy ................................................................... 12-2
Condtn ....................................................................................... 6-8 front panel ................................................................................ 2-1
contents of package ..................................................................... 2 fuse
coupling replacement .................................................................... 15-8
input .................................................................................. 5-2 parts number ......................................................................... 3
trigger .............................................................................. 6-16
cursor ...................................................................... 8-1, 8-5, 8-19
cursor measurements ............................................................. 1-18 G Page
Index

GND ................................................................................... 1-2, 5-2

D Page GO/NO-GO determination ......................................... 1-20, Ch 9
GO/NO-GO signal output ..................................................... 9-13
Index
data list ..................................................................... 12-15, 13-15 graticule ........................................................................ 1-17, 7-14

IM 701510-01E Index-1
Index

H Page N Page

halting a waveform .................................................................. 4-5 N-SGL ..................................................................................... 6-13

Hanning window .......................................................... 1-19, 8-18 normal mode ......................................................... 1-10, 6-12, 7-1
hardcopy ....................................................................... 1-21, 10-4 NTSC ........................................................................................ 6-5
HDTV ........................................................................................ 6-5
HF rejection .................................................................. 1-11, 6-16
history memory .............................................................. 1-14, 7-9 O Page
hold-off ................................................................................... 1-11
hold-off time .......................................................................... 6-19 offset voltage ............................................................................ 5-2
horizontal position ......................................................... 1-7, 5-12 options .......................................................................................... 2
OR trigger ................................................................................. 6-7
output signal ........................................................................... 14-1
I Page

image data ................................................................. 12-11,13-11 P Page

information ......................................................... 7-15, 10-4, 14-3
initialization ................................................................... 1-20, 4-4 PAL ........................................................................................... 6-5
input coupling ................................................................... 1-2, 5-2 paper size ........................................................ 10-9, 12-12, 13-12
input filter ....................................................................... 1-13, 7-3 pen
installation ................................................................................ 3-2 mode ................................................................................ 10-9
INT ........................................................................................... 5-8 speed ................................................................................ 10-9
intensity ........................................................................ 1-17, 7-16 phase shift ............................................................................... 8-16
interpolation plotter ...................................................................................... 10-7
line ................................................................................... 1-14 polarity ...................................................................................... 6-5
pulse ................................................................................ 1-16 position
sine .................................................................................. 1-14 moving .................................................................... 5-7, 5-12
interpolation ........................................................................... 7-11 power cord
intrpl ........................................................................................ 7-11 connecting ......................................................................... 3-5
inverted waveform ............................................................ 1-3, 5-5 suffix code ............................................................................ 2
power spectrum
display ................................................................... 1-19, 8-18
K Page measurement ................................................................... 8-19
power switch ............................................................................ 3-6
keyboard ................................................................................... 4-8 precautions ............................................................................... 3-1
printer .......................................................................... 10-1, 10-11
printer density ........................................................................ 14-4
L Page printing
real-time ................................................................ 1-21, 10-6
line ......................................................................................... 7-11 waveforms ............................................................ 10-3, 10-8
linear scaling ................................................................ 1-18, 8-14 probe
loading attenuation ......................................................... 1-2, 3-7, 5-4
setting parameters ................................................ 12-9, 13-9 compensating .................................................................... 3-8
waveforms ............................................................ 12-4, 13-4 connecting ......................................................................... 3-7
long copy ................................................................................ 10-5 protecting .................................................................. 12-14, 13-14
proximal value ......................................................................... 8-8
pulse ........................................................................................ 7-11
M Page

MainZoom display ......................................................... 1-13, 7-4 R Page

math ............................................................................... 1-19, 8-16
measurement real-time printing ................................................................... 1-20
automated ................................................................ 1-18, 8-7 rear panel .................................................................................. 2-1
cursor ....................................................................... 1-18, 8-1 recalling
parameters ....................................................................... 8-11 setting parameters ................................................ 1-21, 11-4
menu map ............................................................................ App-1 waveforms ............................................................ 1-21, 11-1
mode ........................................................................................ 6-12 record length .......................................................................... 5-10
model name .................................................................................. 2 reference waveform ................................................................. 8-9
rejection HF .................................................................. 1-11, 6-16
repetitive sampling mode ........................................................ 7-2
resolution ........................................................................ 5-7, 5-12
roll mode ................................................................................. 5-12
ROM version .......................................................................... 14-3

Index-2 IM 701510-01E
 Index

S Page position ................................................................. 1-11, 6-17

setting ....................................................................... 1-8, ch 6
safety precautions ........................................................................ 4 source ......................................................................... 1-8, 6-1
sample rate ............................................................. App-2, App-5 TV ............................................................................... 1-8, 6-5
sampling type ............................................................................. 1-8, 6-1
mode .............................................................. 1-12, 5-10, 7-1 width ........................................................................ 1-9, 6-10
real-time ............................................................................ 1-6 window ....................................................................... 1-8, 6-4
repetitive ........................................................................... 1-6 troubleshooting ...................................................................... 15-1
point .................................................................................. 1-6 type name ..................................................................................... 2
saving
screen image data ............................................. 12-11, 13-11
setting parameters ................................................ 12-9, 13-9 U Page
waveform data ...................................................... 12-4, 13-4
scale ............................................................................... 1-17, 7-14 unit
scaling linear ................................................................ 1-18, 8-14 conventions ........................................................................... 7
screen intensity ...................................................................... 7-16 of linear scaling ............................................................. 8-15
self test .................................................................................... 15-7
sequential store .............................................................. 1-14, 7-7
setting parameters .................................................................. 11-4 V Page
setting values ............................................................................ 4-7
short copy ............................................................................... 10-4 VAR ........................................................................................... 5-6
signal flow ................................................................................ 1-1 version .................................................................................... 14-3
sine ......................................................................................... 7-11 vertical axis setting ................................................................. 1-2
single (N) mode ........................................................... 1-10, 6-13 vertical position ................................................................ 1-3, 5-7
single (long) mode ....................................................... 1-10, 6-12 vertical sensitivity .................................................... 1-3, 5-2, 5-6
single (short) mode ...................................................... 1-10, 6-12
smoothing ....................................................................... 1-12, 7-3
snapshot .......................................................................... 1-20, 4-5 W Page
software version ..................................................................... 14-3
source ...................................................................................... 11-2 waveform
spare parts ..................................................................................... 3 accumulation .................................................................. 7-12
storing computation .......................................................... 8-16, 8-18
setting parameters ................................................ 1-21, 11-4 display ON/OFF ............................................................... 5-1
waveforms ............................................................ 1-21, 11-1 erasing ............................................................................... 4-5
suffix code .................................................................................... 2 expansion ................................................................ 1-13, 7-4
system condition .................................................................... 14-3 halting ............................................................................... 4-5
system configuration ............................................................... 1-1 information ........................................................... 7-15, 10-3
inversion .................................................................... 1-3, 5-5
loading .................................................................. 12-4, 13-4
T Page math ....................................................................... 1-18, 8-16
measurement ................................................................... Ch 8
T/div ........................................................................................ 5-10 parameters ......................................................................... 8-7
test ......................................................................................... 15-7 printing ............................................................................ 10-3
threshold level .......................................................................... 5-8 recalling .......................................................................... 11-1
time axis setting ............................................................. 1-5, 5-10 saving .............................................................................. 12-4
time stamp ......................................................................... 7-7, 7-9 storing ............................................................................. 11-1
timebase selection ............................................................. 1-4, 5-8 X-Y .................................................................................. 7-13
timeout .................................................................................... 6-10 zone ................................................................................... 9-1
trigger zooming ............................................................................ 7-4
action-on ............................................................... 1-10, 6-14
coupling ................................................................ 1-10, 6-16
delay ............................................................ 1-11, 6-17, 6-18 X Page
edge ............................................................................ 1-8, 6-2
EXT ................................................................................... 6-3 X-Y waveform display ................................................ 1-16, 7-13
hold-off ........................................................................... 1-11 X-Y waveform measurement .................................................. 8-5
level ............................................................................ 1-8, 6-1
LINE .................................................................................. 6-3
mode ...................................................................... 1-10, 6-12 Z Page
Index

OR ............................................................................... 1-9, 6-7

output signal ................................................................... 14-1 ZOOM display ....................................................................... 1-13
pattern ........................................................................ 1-9, 6-8 Zooming waveforms ................................................................ 7-4
point ................................................................................ 6-17 Index

IM 701510-01E Index-3